Category: Valcom

PagePac 2 WATT HORN (70V) – V-5331200 WATT HORN (70V) – V-5331205 15 Watt and 30 Watt 70-Volt Horns are suit- for large and/or noisy areas such as, ware- and manufacturing facilities. Minimum mounting height for a horn is 15 feet, 20 is preferable. However, in a system with talk- (hands-free answer back) the speaker may to be mounted as low as 8 to 12 feet and set a lower power setting. must be mounted in locations that pro- a clear sound path to the area paged. In with high shelving, more horns may be for adequate coverage. To avoid feed- do not place telephones or microphones horns. Various power outputs can be easily on the speakers, using the rotary power Has variable wattage settings Tables 1 and 2 or Figures 3 and 4) Works with 25V or 70V systems Specifications Frequency Response: (275 Hz – 14kHz) (225 Hz – 14kHz) Dispersion: (110 / 30W (100 dB SPL @ 1W, 1 Meter: (111 dB) / 30W (112 dB) Requirements 15W: 25V system: .225W to 1.87W adjustable system: .25W to 15W adjustable 30W: 25V system: .15W to 3.75W adjustable system: 1.2W to 30W adjustable x 8″H x 9″D (20.3 x 20.3 x 22.9 cm) 15 Watt Horn (4 lbs./1.8 kg) 30 Watt Horn (6 lbs./2.7 kg) x 9.5″H x 10.5″D x 24.1 x 26.7cm) Temperature: 0 to 40 (32 to 104 Humidity: 0 to 85% the wing nut and remove the tapered lock- pin. Separate the horn from the bracket. the bracket using appropriate hardware supplied). Reattach the horn to the bracket. the horn for convenient wiring and hand the wing nut. CONNECTIONS clear plastic cover protects the horn screw ter- and provides strain relief for the wires. Remove the two screws from the plastic cover. Connect the audio wires to the horn. Connect the (+) 70V speaker wire to 2 (see Figure 2). Connect the (-) common side speaker wire to 1 (see Figure 2). Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Do not replace the plastic cover until final adjustments have been made. POWER ADJUSTMENTS a page is in process, adjust the power tap control with a screwdriver. Turn clockwise increase the volume (see Figure 2). Protect hearing when working around ON FLAT SURFACE 1 ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 NUT 2 1: 15 WATT SETTINGS 2: 30 WATT SETTINGS Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – WATT HORN PROJECTION DISTANCE SETTINGS FOR 70 VOLT SPK WATT WATT WATT WATT WATT WATT TO 20 dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB THE NOISE LEVEL IS 90dB OR GREATER, IS SUGGESTED THE 30 WATT HORN BE USED 3 WATT

PagePac 2 WATT HORN (70V) – V-5331200 WATT HORN (70V) – V-5331205 15 Watt and 30 Watt 70-Volt Horns are suit- for large and/or noisy areas such as, ware- and manufacturing facilities. Minimum mounting height for a horn is 15 feet, 20 is preferable. However, in a system with talk- (hands-free answer back) the speaker may to be mounted as low as 8 to 12 feet and set a lower power setting. must be mounted in locations that pro- a clear sound path to the area paged. In with high shelving, more horns may be for adequate coverage. To avoid feed- do not place telephones or microphones horns. Various power outputs can be easily on the speakers, using the rotary power Has variable wattage settings Tables 1 and 2 or Figures 3 and 4) Works with 25V or 70V systems Specifications Frequency Response: (275 Hz – 14kHz) (225 Hz – 14kHz) Dispersion: (110 / 30W (100 dB SPL @ 1W, 1 Meter: (111 dB) / 30W (112 dB) Requirements 15W: 25V system: .225W to 1.87W adjustable system: .25W to 15W adjustable 30W: 25V system: .15W to 3.75W adjustable system: 1.2W to 30W adjustable x 8″H x 9″D (20.3 x 20.3 x 22.9 cm) 15 Watt Horn (4 lbs./1.8 kg) 30 Watt Horn (6 lbs./2.7 kg) x 9.5″H x 10.5″D x 24.1 x 26.7cm) Temperature: 0 to 40 (32 to 104 Humidity: 0 to 85% the wing nut and remove the tapered lock- pin. Separate the horn from the bracket. the bracket using appropriate hardware supplied). Reattach the horn to the bracket. the horn for convenient wiring and hand the wing nut. CONNECTIONS clear plastic cover protects the horn screw ter- and provides strain relief for the wires. Remove the two screws from the plastic cover. Connect the audio wires to the horn. Connect the (+) 70V speaker wire to 2 (see Figure 2). Connect the (-) common side speaker wire to 1 (see Figure 2). Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Do not replace the plastic cover until final adjustments have been made. POWER ADJUSTMENTS a page is in process, adjust the power tap control with a screwdriver. Turn clockwise increase the volume (see Figure 2). Protect hearing when working around ON FLAT SURFACE 1 ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 NUT 2 1: 15 WATT SETTINGS 2: 30 WATT SETTINGS Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – WATT HORN PROJECTION DISTANCE SETTINGS FOR 70 VOLT SPK WATT WATT WATT WATT WATT WATT TO 20 dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB THE NOISE LEVEL IS 90dB OR GREATER, IS SUGGESTED THE 30 WATT HORN BE USED 3 WATT

PagePac WATT VOICE-COIL HORN 2 1 Watt Voice-Coil Horn is suitable for paging smaller, quiet warehouse and manufacturing Normal mounting height for a horn is 15 20 feet. However, in a system with talk-back answer back) the speaker may have be mounted as low as 8 to 12 feet and set at a power setting. Talkback is not recom- for noisy environments. Design enables the adjustment of sound level speaker transformer taps. As the taps are down, the power consumption from the also goes down and does not consume the one watt. The 1 Watt Voice-Coil Horn is not compatible 25 or 70V systems Specifications Frequency Response: 700Hz – 6kHz Dispersion: 80 Output: 107 dB SPL @ 1W, 1 Meter Requirements .016 to 1 Watt adjustable 3 lbs.(1.4 kg) x 8.2″D (17.3cm x 20.8cm) Temperature: 0 to 40 (32 to 104 Humidity: 0 to 85% not connect more than two horns per talkback Speakers must be mounted in locations provide a clear sound path to the area being Avoid placing speakers in front of shelves, or other obstructions. To avoid feed- do not place telephones close to horns. power outputs/tap settings can be easily on the speakers, using the rotary power the wing nut and remove the tapered lock- pin. Separate the horn from the bracket. the bracket using appropriate hardware supplied). Position the horn back on the for optimum sound direction and install pin and wing nut. (see Figure 1). CONNECTIONS clear plastic cover protects the horn screw ter- and provides strain relief for the wires. Remove the two screws from the plastic cover. Connect the audio wires to the horn. Connect the (+) side of the speaker wire to ter- 2. Connect the (-) common side of the wire to terminal 1 (see Figure 2). Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Do not replace the plastic cover until final adjustments have been made. POWER ADJUSTMENTS that the speaker is set to its lowest setting will prevent an excessively loud page when used). While a page is in process, adjust the control with a screwdriver. Turn clockwise increase the volume (see Table 1). ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Repair Dept. Inc. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 ON FLAT SURFACE NUT BRACKET 1 LEVEL ONLY SETTINGS TO 4) CABLE 2 1: SWITCH SETTINGS POWER SPL WATTS DECIBELS Vrms Input Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – WATT (VOICE-COIL) HORN PROJECTION DISTANCE PRESSURE LEVELS AND WATTAGE SETTINGS FOR 3.4 VOLT SPK WATT WATT WATT WATT dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB TO 20 to Side to 91 dB to 88 dB 70 dB 3 EACH SPEAKER ON ITS OWN MINIMUM 22 GA. WIRE RUN. RUN NOT TO EXCEED 300 FEET. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac WATT SUSPENDED-RADIAL HORN V-5331210 2 speakers that produce high sound levels are of covering large noisy areas. effective mounting height for a horn is The Suspended-Radial Horn is used 360 sound dispersion pattern is required. Speaker is provided with 10 mounting If this is not enough, additional chain must acquired. See suggested mounting height for requirements (Figure 2). High Intelligibility Built-in Transformer 360 Radial Dispersion Specifications Frequency Response: 225Hz – 14kHz Dispersion: 360 112 dB @ 1W, 1 Meter 70 Volt / 30 Watt 13.0″W x 11.8″H (33.0cm x 29.9cm) lbs. (4.5 kg) Temperature: 0 to 40 (32 to 104 Humidity: 0 to 85% the 10 foot metal chain supplied with the to the post and ring on the horn base (see 1). device used to attach the chain to the ceiling withstand a 30 pound pull test, or the weight by local construction or safety codes, is greater. CONNECTIONS clear plastic cover protects the horn screw ter- and provides strain relief for the wires. Remove the two screws from the plastic cover. Set volume adjustment to lowest setting. Connect the (+) 70V side of the speaker wire to 2. Connect the (-) or common side of speaker wire to terminal 1 (see Figure 1). Do not replace the plastic cover until final adjustments have been made. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – POWER ADJUSTMENTS that the speaker is set to its lowest setting will prevent an excessively loud page when used). Conduct test page and increase vol- as necessary with a screwdriver. Turn clock- to increase the volume (see Table 1). Install plastic cover. Due to high decibel output, it is not recom- to test paging while working closely with horn speaker. ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 RING CHAIN CABLE LEVEL NOT FORCE #7) 1 1: SWITCH SETTINGS NOT USE NOT USE NOT USE NOT USE Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB WATT RADIAL HORN PROJECTION DISTANCE SETTINGS FOR 70 VOLT SPK SHOWN IS THE RADIUS OF CIRCLE OR DISTANCE FROM SPK WATT WATT WATT WATT WATT USE ATTENUATOR FT 2 FT FT FT FT FT FT Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

VSP-V-1011/V-1012 5 AMPLIFIED RECESSED CEILING SPEAKERS AMPLIFIED RECESSED CEILING SPEAKERS instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate and maintain Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers. and installation information for the rings and backboxes used with these is also included in this document. speakers are for use with any Valcom page and are for interior use only. Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers are used provide one-way paging when used with a low audio input. Valcom Paging Adapters Electronic Key System Page Ports (interface may be required) PABX Page Ports (interface adapter may be Stand Alone Systems Existing 70V Paging Systems Background Music Systems Self-contained amplifier and volume control Operates on -24VDC Screw terminals for all connections Grille simulates recessed lighting fixture No visible mounting hardware due to concealed studs for the speaker and torsion Specifications Amplifier Input Impedance Amplifier Input Level Amplifier Output Ohm nominal nominal watt into 45 Ohm load Requirements to 50 degrees C to 85% non-precipitating V-1011BB – 4″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Dia x 5.0 (19.81cm Dia. x 12.7cm D) lbs. (2.63 kg) V-1011MR – 4″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Ring Dia x 5.0 (19.81cm Dia. x 12.7cm D) lbs. (1.09 kg) V-1012BB – 8″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Dia x 6.0 Dia. x 15.24cm D) lbs. (2.86 kg) Ring Dia x 6.0 Dia. x 15.24cm D) lbs. (1.50 kg) V-1012MR – 8″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Manuals Online! – DESIGN Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers may be to provide one-way paging from any Valcom or talkback page control. The speakers can be used to expand existing 70V paging systems. power and appropriate input signal are applied, voice page can be made. Control Access Figure 1) using the Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers a Valcom page control, the following equipment be required: Appropriate one-way speaker assembly Valcom page control Valcom power supply sized to provide power to the amplified speaker assemblies and control When using the Valcom one-way interior with a Valcom handsfree page control, it recommended that a V-1092 Volume Control be between the zone output and the input. or 70V Paging Systems Figure 2) using the Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers an existing 25 or 70V paging system, the equipment will be required: Appropriate one-way speaker assembly Valcom power supply sized to provide power to the amplified speaker assemblies or 70V line transformer tapped at 1/4 watt an 8 ohm output Valcom V-1094A Page Port Preamp/Expander Applications Tip and Ring input of the amplified speaker may connected directly to the speaker in most key telephones to amplify the level of the A power supply is also required. Cabling Valcom amplified one-way interior speakers 2 pairs to operate. Standard telephone station may be used. Existing telephone wire and cables may also be used. Refer to the tables when planning an installation. Audio Pair: The number of speakers looped on audio pair is not critical unless you have a large job. Table 1 gives guidelines for the of speakers per audio run. 1 – Number of Speakers per Audio Run AWG Run (Ft) AWG Power Pair: The cable runs specified in Table 2 very important and must be followed for operation of the one-way paging speakers. 2 – Number of Speakers per Power Run AWG) Run (Ft) Watt Inside Speakers area covered by Valcom Recessed Ceiling

PagePac 1 WATT EXPLOSION PROOF HORN Proof Horn Speakers are constructed that all electrical components are sealed from atmosphere and may be used in areas where substances are present. The explosion speakers require some assembly before (see Figure 1). proof speakers are mounted, using the mounting bracket (attached to each These brackets are intended primarily mounting on flat surfaces, and each bracket three holes which may be used for installing hardware. Speaker position in the verti- axis may be adjusted by loosening the bolts secure the bracket to the speaker body Figure 1). UL/CSA Approved Heavy Duty Construction Omni-Directional Mounting Bracket 5 Tap Settings (2.5W, 5W, 10W, 20W, 40W) Specifications Dispersion: Wide Angle Input: 70.7V Line Output: 101dB – 113dB 16.5 x 21.5 x 54.6cm) 27 lbs. (12.2 kg) Temperature: -4 to 131 F (-20 to 55 C) Humidity: to 95% the horn and the base of the speaker by the base of the speaker tightly and turning horn counterclockwise (see Figure 1, View 1). the two halves of the speaker base by the eight bolts (see Figure 1, View 2). the conduit entry into the speaker as by local ordinances for the class and type speaker used (see Figure 1, View 3). the speaker cable, separate the inner wires for distance of 3 or 4 inches by stripping away insu- from the main cable. If using shielded cable, inner wire without insulation is the shield wire. approximately 1/2 inch of insulation from the of each of the smaller insulated wires. The cable must enter the speaker through a that has been installed according to local for the class and type of speaker the wires on terminals 1 and 2. If cable is used, either splice the shield to provide a continuous shield to the next or clip the shield wire at the point where emerges from the main cable, as appropriate. shield wire should not be terminated on the Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support. Visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 ADJUSTMENTS necessary, remove the power tap selection wire wire) and reattach it to the desired power The numbers on the terminal strip indicate the in watts for a 70-volt paging system (on a paging system, the output will be approxi- 1/8 of that indicated (see Table 1)). the two halves of the speaker case reinstalling the eight bolts. TO AMPLIFIER special care in removing back cover of proof driver enclosure (Part 1) to avoid machined surfaces. Prior to reassem- make certain that joining surfaces of enclo- are free of dirt. Tighten all cover bolts To provide the specified protection in locations, please note that no com- of any type is to be applied on machined 1. 40-Watt Explosion Proof 70V Power 25V Power Setting Ohms Watts Watts TO DESIRED POWER TAP explosion proof speaker has a one- conduit access into the sealed Conduit entry into the speaker must made in accordance with local codes the Class and Group of speaker being See Connection Procedures. AMPLIFIER 1 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

VSP-45 ohm 6 OHM TALKBACK INTERIOR SPEAKERS WITH LED V-1062B, V-1064B, V-1066B instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain 45 Ohm Talkback Interior Speaker Assemblies LED. 45 Ohm Talkback Interior Speaker Assemblies LED are for use with the Valcom “handsfree” page control units and provide both and talkback functions with LED in the monitor condition. These speakers for interior use only. Ohm Impedance Inch Speaker LED indicator Easy Hook-up (2 connections using house cable station wire) 8″ Ceiling Speaker w/LED Dia. X 2.5″ D Dia. x 6.35cm D) lbs. (1.09 kg) Wall Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille H x 9.7 W x 5.2 D x 24.6cmW x 13.2cmD) lbs. (2.41 kg) Corner Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille x 9.75 x 6.3 x 24.1cmW x 16cmD) lbs. (1.63 kg) Corridor Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille – x 10.3″W x 4.2″D x 26.2cmW x 10.7cmD) lbs (2.59 kg) Requirements mA @ -24 Vdc max (for powering the LED) to +55oC non-precipitating DESIGN 45 Ohm Talkback Speakers are designed to be with the Valcom “handsfree” talkback control In combination with these units, they will both loudspeaker and talkback functions with indication. Manuals Online! – standard Valcom talkback paging system is made of three basic components: Do not split pairs to speakers. Do not use talkback in noisy areas (80dB or Talkback Speaker Selection recommends that the total number of per talkback zone be limited to two talkback forty one-way self-amplified speakers. The behind this recommendation is simple. a page is made into a talkback zone, the party will hear audio from all of the talkback in that zone. If a zone contains more than talkback speakers, the talkback audio from the speakers will impede the quality of the audio from the desired speaker. there are limits to the number of speakers that a page control will actually if a page were made into a talkback zone, all the speakers would simply act like “one-way” except for the one that is closest to the person. Talkback capability can be provided utilizing a V-9922A Talkback Speaker Selection for each talkback speaker. (A V-9928 Wall 5 Watt Amplifier is also required for every six talkback speakers). a page is made, all speakers provide one-way 1,0+(2-(cid:8)$/(cid:12).1(.3/ $ (cid:9)(cid:9)!(cid:13) (cid:7)(cid:10)%(cid:14)(2(cid:5)(cid:13)(cid:30)(cid:2)(cid:6)(cid:3)(cid:7) In order to respond, the paged party the closest speaker with a press of the of that speakers associated talkback selection unit. This activates the chosen as a talkback speaker and resets any selected speaker. Contact Valcom Support at (540) 427-3900 for additional A talkback page control unit. Speakers (45 Ohm) A power supply. the “B” series 45 Ohm Talkback Interior with LED can be used with all Valcom Control Units, consult Valcom VSP Talkback Paging (947100) for detailed on selecting the control unit and power Only the Valcom V-1109RTHF and V-

PagePac 2 VOLT DESKTOP SPEAKER 70 Volt Desktop Speaker is a completely 1/8 watt speaker unit for use with 70V systems. Each speaker is equipped with a cord and a SE-41A Connecting Block, is used to connect the speaker cord to the system speaker wires Figure 1). Volume Control Privacy / Talkback Switch 4.75 x 1.75 x 6.88 X 4.50cm X 17.48cm) 3.0 lbs (1.35 kg) Desktop Speaker is recommended for use all PagePac telephone paging systems (or systems) in which talkback is provided is two-way communication between the telephone and the paging loudspeaker). the Desktop Speaker may be used with- talkback. is recommended that each Desktop Speaker, used with talkback, be a separate paging If this is not feasible, the total number of Speakers in any one zone should be lim- to two or less. AND CONTROLS SWITCH the position, this switch allows two-way between the Desktop Speaker the paging telephone (once the paging tele- has accessed the speaker). In the talkback is inhibited and the speaker only as a one-way speaker. CONTROL control adjusts the speaker volume in the page and music modes (see Figure 1). It not affect the talkback level. the Desktop Speaker in the desired loca- Locate a convenient spot on the wall adja- to the speaker for the connecting block. the connecting block and attach it to the wall suitable mounting hardware, not supplied Figure 1). Connect the 70V and common from the speaker cord to the and ter- on the connecting block. Connect the red black wires from the paging system to the terminals on the connecting block. Con- the shield wire to the terminal (shielded cable is recommended). the connecting block. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – the Desktop Speaker and ensure that occurs. While a page is in progress, adjust speaker volume. While a page is in progress, the PRIVACY/TALKBACK switch in the and verify that two-way communication is Then place this switch in the and ensure that talkback is inhibited. Generally, music volume should be at the music source or on the PagePac or system amplifier. ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 WIRES CORD – 4IA WIRE SPEAKER FROM SYSTEM WIRE WIRES 1 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac 1 COMPLIANT STROBE instructions contain the specifications and information to install, operate, and maintain the ADA Compliant Cost effective and versatile solution to applications visual alerts or strobes ADA compliant with a 110 Candella rating Typical coverage of 4900 sq. ft. @ 80″ mounting height Supplied with accessories to fit almost any application Methods 70 volt amplified speaker signal Dry contact closure Electronic Message Sign 5V signal 4.50″H x 4.50″W x 4.55″D (11.43cm H x 11.43cm W x 11.56cm D) 1.38 lbs. (.63 kg) Brightness Power supply operating voltage input Strobe minimum operating voltage Strobe maximum operating voltage Current draw Maximum instantaneous Activation voltage requirements – Electronic message sign – 70 volt audio signal Activation voltage 70 volts minimum Environmental Rating Connector Cable footage Mounting hardware Lens color Faceplate cover Metal case Candella at 3 volts volts peak volts feet wall hangers Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Cable Supply Band Band Band Spk Line Spk Line Contact Closure Sign Plug 1. Connecting the ADA Compliant Strobe ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test set available and call from the job site. (800) 782-5266 and ask for PagePac Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at http://www.pagepac.com and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac 1 LEVEL CONTROLLER Ambient Level Controller (ALC) constantly monitors noise and adjusts the paging level to accommodate any changes in noise level. It has a built-in Sound Level (SPL) meter. ALC has two inputs, a loop start input (Telco) and a 600 Ohm line input. The Telco input shall have over the line input. The microphone can be placed to 5000 feet from the ALC with shielded wire. The ALC five contact closure clock or remote control inputs. The ALC has four double throw relay outputs that on the -6 dB and 0 dB levels. ALC adjusts page system level in 6 dB steps. The Telco input is loop start and has priority over the input. The line input has a dry contact closure which will provide an isolated dry contact closure at connections of the line output. Power consumption Frequency Response Signal to noise (dB ref.) Maximum output level Output relay activaltion points Output relay contact rating Number of relay output contacts Input level controls (internal) Control requirements Input types Output types Contact closure on output Contact closure controlled input Front panel controls Front panel indicators Maximum MIC line length Watts Hz to 15 KHz + 2dB than -60dB -12dB with jumper installed and -6dB gain reduction Amp contact closure Telco (loop start only) (600 Ohm) manual or automatic automatic input active feet Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Allows automatic, manual or remote control of paging system audio levels SPL meter with over 50 dB range built-in Microphone can be placed up to 5000 feet from unit Balanced 600 Ohm inputs and outputs Loop Start Telco input with priority over line input Clock contact closure or remote control input connections Relay outputs for emergency override or indicators Dry contact closure on line input activates isolated dry contact closure on line output Internal microprocessor senses ambient noise via a MIC input, and adjusts the paging level Rack or wall mount, single rack space 24VAC UL listed power supply, Part 15 (FCC) approved 17 x 1.75 x 8.75 (19 with rack ears) x 4.45cm x 22.23cm) 8 lbs. (3.63 kg) 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C) 0 to 85% non-condensing ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test set available and call from the job site. (800) 782-5266 and ask for PagePac Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at http://www.pagepac.com and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – PORT Use only the Log Current Microphone. standard microphone will be if connected to the FM-15. OHM PORT LINE These terminals are redundant input connections. Useful a modular RJ-11 plug and is not suitable. Modular or Input V olts AC In Start In G + – Only Only C Outputs NO C Inputs or Remote Control C C C C C C Out – C1 C G B Y Out to Page Input These terminals are redundant input connections. Useful a modular RJ-11 plug and is not suitable. V AC, 50/60 Hz dBm OUT AGE IN – R

VSP 1010C/-20C/-20KNOB/-21C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR CEILING SPEAKERS Ceiling Speakers, V-1010C, V-1020C, V-1020KNOB, and V-1021C are self-amplified and are capable of voice paging as well as background music. The V-1020KNOB has a permanent knob for volume the V-1010C and V-1020C feature a removable volume control knob, and the V-1021C has an accessible volume control that can be adjusted by screwdriver through the center hole on the grille. The is a 4-inch speaker and the others are 8-inch speakers. All speakers require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) are FCC Part 68 registered under BAFUSA-69358-KX-N. V-1010C V-1020C/-20KNOB V-1021C x 2.9 x 3 x 3 Dia. x 7.37cm D) Dia. x 7.6cm D) Dia x 7.6cm D) lbs. (.77kg) lbs. (1.14kg) lbs. (.68kg) Manuals Online! – Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Do not connect this speaker directly a 25/70/100 volt amplifier as damage to the amplifier and speaker may occur. A may be used to allow the use of self-amplified speakers on 70V lines. 1: TYPICAL CONNECTIONS !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28)(cid:7)(cid:15)(cid:20)(cid:7)(cid:11)(cid:6)(cid:16)(cid:2)(cid:5)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:9)(cid:17)(cid:6)(cid:17) !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28) (cid:27) (cid:8)(cid:7)(cid:15)(cid:9)(cid:20)(cid:10)(cid:22)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:22)(cid:10)(cid:15)(cid:2)(cid:9)(cid:20) !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28)# !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28)(cid:7)(cid:30)(cid:11)(cid:15)(cid:17)”(cid:6)

PagePac WATT, 70 VOLT ATTENUATOR (V-5335005) WATT, 70 VOLT ATTENUATOR (V-5335001) WATT, VOICE-COIL 3.4V ATTENUATOR (V-5335010) 2 70 Volt attenuator may be installed to control the of a single speaker or of a group of speak- It can adjust the speaker output from no out- up to the maximum output selected by the power taps. Voice-Coil attenuator is used to control the of both cone and horn type voice-coil (3.4 Volts). The 35-Watt model is single-gang construction, the 75-Watt model is dual-gang construc- When installing the attenuators, the deep electrical outlet box must be A standard depth box will not work. Voice-coil attenuators are provided in a deep, electrical outlet box. When installing gang box and mounting the attenuator in the standard industry practices should be fol- Specifications The 70 Volt attenuators consist of an auto-trans- and a 10-position switch mounted on a plate. Two different 70 Volt attenuators are 35 Watt and 75 Watt (see Table 1). 35 Watt Attenuator x 2.75 x 2.25 x 6.99cm x 5.72cm) lbs.(.45 kg) 75 Watt Attenuator x 4.5 x 2.5 x 11.43cm x 6.35cm) lbs.(.45 kg) Watt 75 Watt 3 Watt 3 Watt Attenuator x 2.75 x 3.0 x 6.99cm x 7.62cm) lbs. (.40 kg) Volt Attenuator 70 Volt attenuator must have a power rating that greater than the sum of all outputs from the indi- speakers it controls. For example, if an is controlling 3 horn speakers and each an output of 5 Watts, the attenuator rating exceed 15 Watts (5 + 5 + 5). In this case, the model would be used (see Table 1). Attenuator is a limit to the number of speakers that be controlled by a single attenuator. As a rule, the limit is 12 cone-type or 3 horn- speakers per attenuator. When using both and cone speakers on a single speaker run, the purpose of calculating maximum load per each horn-type speaker is worth 4 types (3 Watts maximum load). Figure 1 for wire connections between the equipment, the speaker(s) and 70 Volt Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 USE WIRE NUT CONNECTORS THREE OR MORE WIRES (PROVIDED) SPEAKER UT AMPLIFIER USE “B” CRIMP-TYPE FOR TW0 (PROVIDED) 0 AND ATTENUATORS 1 1: Attenuator Specifications (70 volt) Number Rating Watts Watts Watts Positions 10 Auto-Trans 10 Auto-Trans 10 Per Step Attenuation Loss Plate dB dB dB dB dB dB Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac WATT, 70 VOLT ATTENUATOR (V-5335005) WATT, 70 VOLT ATTENUATOR (V-5335001) WATT, VOICE-COIL 3.4V ATTENUATOR (V-5335010) 2 70 Volt attenuator may be installed to control the of a single speaker or of a group of speak- It can adjust the speaker output from no out- up to the maximum output selected by the power taps. Voice-Coil attenuator is used to control the of both cone and horn type voice-coil (3.4 Volts). The 35-Watt model is single-gang construction, the 75-Watt model is dual-gang construc- When installing the attenuators, the deep electrical outlet box must be A standard depth box will not work. Voice-coil attenuators are provided in a deep, electrical outlet box. When installing gang box and mounting the attenuator in the standard industry practices should be fol- Specifications The 70 Volt attenuators consist of an auto-trans- and a 10-position switch mounted on a plate. Two different 70 Volt attenuators are 35 Watt and 75 Watt (see Table 1). 35 Watt Attenuator x 2.75 x 2.25 x 6.99cm x 5.72cm) lbs.(.45 kg) 75 Watt Attenuator x 4.5 x 2.5 x 11.43cm x 6.35cm) lbs.(.45 kg) Watt 75 Watt 3 Watt 3 Watt Attenuator x 2.75 x 3.0 x 6.99cm x 7.62cm) lbs. (.40 kg) Volt Attenuator 70 Volt attenuator must have a power rating that greater than the sum of all outputs from the indi- speakers it controls. For example, if an is controlling 3 horn speakers and each an output of 5 Watts, the attenuator rating exceed 15 Watts (5 + 5 + 5). In this case, the model would be used (see Table 1). Attenuator is a limit to the number of speakers that be controlled by a single attenuator. As a rule, the limit is 12 cone-type or 3 horn- speakers per attenuator. When using both and cone speakers on a single speaker run, the purpose of calculating maximum load per each horn-type speaker is worth 4 types (3 Watts maximum load). Figure 1 for wire connections between the equipment, the speaker(s) and 70 Volt Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 USE WIRE NUT CONNECTORS THREE OR MORE WIRES (PROVIDED) SPEAKER UT AMPLIFIER USE “B” CRIMP-TYPE FOR TW0 (PROVIDED) 0 AND ATTENUATORS 1 1: Attenuator Specifications (70 volt) Number Rating Watts Watts Watts Positions 10 Auto-Trans 10 Auto-Trans 10 Per Step Attenuation Loss Plate dB dB dB dB dB dB Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac WATT, 70 VOLT ATTENUATOR (V-5335005) WATT, 70 VOLT ATTENUATOR (V-5335001) WATT, VOICE-COIL 3.4V ATTENUATOR (V-5335010) 2 70 Volt attenuator may be installed to control the of a single speaker or of a group of speak- It can adjust the speaker output from no out- up to the maximum output selected by the power taps. Voice-Coil attenuator is used to control the of both cone and horn type voice-coil (3.4 Volts). The 35-Watt model is single-gang construction, the 75-Watt model is dual-gang construc- When installing the attenuators, the deep electrical outlet box must be A standard depth box will not work. Voice-coil attenuators are provided in a deep, electrical outlet box. When installing gang box and mounting the attenuator in the standard industry practices should be fol- Specifications The 70 Volt attenuators consist of an auto-trans- and a 10-position switch mounted on a plate. Two different 70 Volt attenuators are 35 Watt and 75 Watt (see Table 1). 35 Watt Attenuator x 2.75 x 2.25 x 6.99cm x 5.72cm) lbs.(.45 kg) 75 Watt Attenuator x 4.5 x 2.5 x 11.43cm x 6.35cm) lbs.(.45 kg) Watt 75 Watt 3 Watt 3 Watt Attenuator x 2.75 x 3.0 x 6.99cm x 7.62cm) lbs. (.40 kg) Volt Attenuator 70 Volt attenuator must have a power rating that greater than the sum of all outputs from the indi- speakers it controls. For example, if an is controlling 3 horn speakers and each an output of 5 Watts, the attenuator rating exceed 15 Watts (5 + 5 + 5). In this case, the model would be used (see Table 1). Attenuator is a limit to the number of speakers that be controlled by a single attenuator. As a rule, the limit is 12 cone-type or 3 horn- speakers per attenuator. When using both and cone speakers on a single speaker run, the purpose of calculating maximum load per each horn-type speaker is worth 4 types (3 Watts maximum load). Figure 1 for wire connections between the equipment, the speaker(s) and 70 Volt Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 USE WIRE NUT CONNECTORS THREE OR MORE WIRES (PROVIDED) SPEAKER UT AMPLIFIER USE “B” CRIMP-TYPE FOR TW0 (PROVIDED) 0 AND ATTENUATORS 1 1: Attenuator Specifications (70 volt) Number Rating Watts Watts Watts Positions 10 Auto-Trans 10 Auto-Trans 10 Per Step Attenuation Loss Plate dB dB dB dB dB dB Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

Issue 1 STACKER Digital Voice Announcer Call Stacker is a microprocessor audio recording and announcement system. The Call is used in conjunction with a paging system to provide announcement play to the paging system. (also see Table 3) Maximum Record Time – 3 Minutes Maximum of 30 Announcements Announcement Verification 5 Analog Station Port Input Channels Requirements 115 Vac, 60 Hz Battery Backup for up to 2 Hours Rack Mountable – 19 (48.3cm) Pause Override Control Provides Audio Output and a Contact Closure 16.25 x 1.75 x 9.25 (41.28cm x 4.45cm x 23.50cm) 13.0 lbs (5.85 kg) 19 (48.3cm) with rack brackets to 95% Temperature: 0 to 40 (32 to 104 Humidity: Call Stacker features 5 Input Station (recording) channels, a single Page Output channel and minutes of recording time. to 5 announcements can be recorded simultaneously, virtually eliminating frustrating delays when accessing the paging system. The recorded announcements are queued in order so first complete announcement recorded, plays first, followed by the second announcement, etc. Call Stacker allows users to verify their announcements before they play to the paging system. If a is not content with their recorded announcement, they can re-record it repeatedly until they are Call Stacker Page Output channel interfaces to the paging system control unit. Once an is recorded, the Call Stacker plays the announcement over the Page Output channel to paging system. While the recorded announcement is playing, the Page Output channel provides a closure to the paging system. the complete recorded announcement plays to the paging system, it is erased from the Call freeing up the recording time for new announcements. Call Stacker can be configured to record and play back paging zone selection signals. Between 2 4 DTMF digits can be entered prior to recording an announcement which, upon output, precede the announcement and select the paging system paging zone. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Associated equipment would need to be powered by an uninterrupted power supply. Call Stacker is equipped with battery backup which allows it to operate for up to two hours, from a charged battery, if a power failure occurs. Attach the reversible 19/23″ brackets to the Call Stacker using the 6-32 x 3/8″ screws provided, then the Call Stacker to a back board or into an equipment rack. 1. Wall Mounted Unit DETAIL D300 Stacker D300 Stacker DETAIL LINE STRIP 2. Rack Mounted Unit Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Set the option switch on the Call Stacker (see Figure 5) for the desired system configuration (refer to 1). 1. Option Switch Setting 1 TO 2 TO 3 TO 4 TO 5 TO 6 TO 7 TO of DTMF Digits in Zone Code Prompts only only

PagePac 1 PLUS CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION GUIDE (V-5335800) PagePac Plus User Interface software package runs on a generic DOS-based IBM PC or compat- It requires no more than 640K RAM and a single 3.5 inch floppy-disk drive. The program operates character mode, and supports both monochrome (MDA or Hercules) and color (CGA or above) dis- and adapters. It uses color if it is available and provides a high-contrast color scheme for use on with Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD). The Controller unit has the ability to retain the configura- options indefinitely. PC connects to an RS-232 port on the rear of the Controller by means of a crossover cable (also a null-modem cable). YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING Fill out Zone Map and Configuration Tables. zone decisions should be made and diagrammed prior to programming. Refer to the Zone Map Zone Configuration Tables in the PagePac Plus Paging Controller Programming and Operation Set Zone Option Switches. If you are using the Zone Mapping feature (page 11), you must determine the controller firmware # before programming. Page 12 describes this procedure. slide switch for each zone must be manually set to one of the following options, depending on the mode selected for each zone: Contact Closure Output (to switch on/off a device, such as a door security lock, remote amplifier, etc.) Contact Closure Input (such as doorbell or security alarm interface) 70V Output for audio Set Dip Switches. Zone Expansion Units are installed, the DIP switch on each unit must be set prior to powering up the and prior to programming. Refer to the PagePac Plus Controller Installation and Use Guide, to the Zone Expansion Unit Installation and Use Guide, for instructions. THE PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE Turn on PC. it boot up. At the DOS prompt C:>> on the screen: Insert diskette. PagePac Plus User Interface diskette into disk drive (A: or B:) and close the drive mechanism. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Type <>: [ENTER]. A: (or B:) and press [ENTER] to direct the DOS system to the correct disk drive. Type PPPLUS [ENTER]. introductory screen will come up, displaying the PagePac Plus startup screen. following command line switches listed can be used after the execute name, i.e., /BW [ENTER]. black & white display mode serial port; also available via options menu item (COM1-COM4) zone map format; also available via config I Map (ISSUE1 or ISSUE2) program version number and options Press any key to continue. screen will be blank except for the Menu Bar across the top of the screen (visible in figure 1). FILE TO OPEN? you want to make changes to the configuration that is currently in use by the PagePac Plus system, step 1. If you want to use the original default configuration (or another version that you have saved) to make changes and then send to the Controller, go to step 2. Change the current configuration. Select Transfer from the Menu Bar. Select Receive from the Transfer menu. will place a copy of the current configuration into the PPPLUS program. You may make changes to and then use the Transfer/Send option to send your modified configuration back to the Controller. Use the default configuration (or another saved version). Select File from the Menu Bar. Select the Load option from the File menu. will be prompted to enter the name of the file you wish to load. If no name is entered, the default file be loaded. may make changes to it and then use the Transfer/Send option to send your modified configuration to the Controller. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – PROCEDURE this summary of steps to implement the configuration changes you wish to make. Depending on needs, you may wish to go directly to the menu(s) and table(s) that access the specific options you to change. Detailed instructions for each step are provided elsewhere in this guide. Load the configuration to be modified. See File to Open (page 2). Make changes to System Parameters. See Parameters (page 6). Make changes to individual Zone or Group Parameters. See Parameters (page 8). this step for each zone or group. Define or ch

PagePac 2 FEEDBACK ELIMINATOR V-5335611 is designed to eliminate acoustic When a page is made, the message is and saved. Upon completion of the live the message is released for broadcast over speakers. (While this page is being another page can be recorded). This the offensive squeal of feedback com- produced by telephones or microphones making a page. Comes with Power Supply Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Adjustable VOX Sensitivity Two Input Channels: selectable for primary and priority or dual with equal priority inputs are switch selectable for loop start Ohms) or VOX activation Two Audio Outputs: Out (600 Ohms) to Page Controller Level (8 Ohms) to Amplified Speakers or Background Music Input (adjustable) Three Normally Open Output Relays: Record, Busy Four LED Indicators: Power On, Play, Record, Busy Dip Switch Programmable Message Cancelling Easy to install in new or existing systems Solid State, DSP Storage and Playback High Fidelity CD Quality Sound Reproduction Loop Start Trunk Port of PBX C. O. Line Position of Key System Page Port Line Level Audio Feed Specifications Ohms Impedance: dBm Level: Ohms Out Output Impedance: Ohms Level Output Impedance: dBm (nominal) Level: Sensitivity: dBm to -35 dBm time after last sensed audio: 3 seconds duration of recorded page:60 seconds number of stored pages: Primary/Priority Mode Call Stacker Mode Response: Music: Hz to 7 kHz Hz to 17 kHz Power Requirements 500mA, Battery 10.3″H x 7.8″W x 2.2″D x19.8cm x 5.6cm) 2.6 lbs. (1.2 kg) Temperature: Humidity: to 40 (32 to 104 to 85% Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Notice equipment has been tested and found to with the limits for Class A digital devices, to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits designed to provide reasonable protection harmful interference when the equipment operated in a commercial environment. This generates, uses, and can radiate radio energy and, if not installed and used in with the instruction manual, may harmful interference to radio communica- Operation of this equipment in a residential is likely to cause harmful interference in case the user will be required to correct the at his own expense. is recommended that Category 3 or 5 twisted telephone wire be used for all wiring connec- to the V-5335611. A screw type connector is provided to allow connection of all wiring to V-5335611. V-5335611 is wall mountable using Connection Access Remove the small right side panel to all controls and terminations. To remove loosen the two screws holding the panel in and lift panel away from the board. Input level or low level source. Do not connect to or Voice-Coil audio output. Program Dip Switches are controls and switches on the board for the options of the V-5335611. Refer Figure 1 (page 5) for location of switches and or Call Stacker Line 1 Input primary input is the path normally used to the unit for recording and playback of a Method Settings Start Trunk Port System C.O. Line Key Alone Telephone Set Port w/Contact Closure Port w/o Cont. Closure Page Ctrl. Output (PagePal) Output C.C. ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON or Call Stacker Line 2 Input access will override primary input activity. Method Settings Start Trunk Port System C.O. Line Key Alone Telephone Set Port w/Contact Closure Port w/o Cont. Closure Page Ctrl. Output (PagePal) Output C.C. ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

No text preview available.

Save Time, & Money On & Off Job Quickly Ceiling Speakers With Backbox Ceiling Speaker Coil Front Accessible Volume Control 1/4 Watt Voice Coil Works With Pagepac 6 And PagePac 6 Plus Talkback Application With PagePac 6 Plus Ceiling Speaker Volt Features .25 Watts To 4 Watts 70 V Tap Settings and Volume Control Works With Pagepac D series 70 volt Amplifiers Talkback Application when used With PagePac Plus Controller and D series Amplifier 23.75″ (60.32 cm) L x 23.75″ (60.32 cm) W x (9.52 cm) D 5.5 lbs (2.48 kg) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – x 2 Lay-in Speaker installs in ceilings for excellent reproduction. Integral meets three hour burn test and rugged lightweight eliminates need for bars. Integral Backbox With Three Hour Burn Rating Replaces 2 x 2 Ceiling Tile Scuff Resistant Perforated Grille Durable White Acrylic Baked Enamel Finish

Save Time, & Money On & Off Job Quickly Ceiling Speakers With Backbox Ceiling Speaker Coil Front Accessible Volume Control 1/4 Watt Voice Coil Works With Pagepac 6 And PagePac 6 Plus Talkback Application With PagePac 6 Plus Ceiling Speaker Volt Features .25 Watts To 4 Watts 70 V Tap Settings and Volume Control Works With Pagepac D series 70 volt Amplifiers Talkback Application when used With PagePac Plus Controller and D series Amplifier 23.75″ (60.32 cm) L x 23.75″ (60.32 cm) W x (9.52 cm) D 5.5 lbs (2.48 kg) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – x 2 Lay-in Speaker installs in ceilings for excellent reproduction. Integral meets three hour burn test and rugged lightweight eliminates need for bars. Integral Backbox With Three Hour Burn Rating Replaces 2 x 2 Ceiling Tile Scuff Resistant Perforated Grille Durable White Acrylic Baked Enamel Finish

Can Assist In Complying with Requirements With The Imparied Centers & Accessories Line Displays 2.25″ (5/82m) H x 19.0 (48.26 cm) W x (12.07 cm) D 3.5 lbs (1.58 kg) V-5332900 to RS/485Connector Kit RS485 Repeater Is Required When More Than 29 Are Used In A Network Or When The Total Distance Exceeds 6,000 Feet. Keyboard V-5332905 programming messages and display of message sign (V-5332100). from 4 Triple A Batteries.Will communicate Visual Message Center from 20 to 30 feet away. a Visual Message Center is Programmed with messages to be displayed other Message Centers the same network can be down loaded with the messages. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Used With The PagePac Plus, Simultaneous Audio & Paging. Ideal for high noise retail advertising or emergency Compatible with RS/232 port of PagePac Plus Controller Capability of one-line display of 2.1 high characters Messages are stored in sign and retained even in power interruptions Display of messages are in 25 attention-getting modes, 8 true colors and 3 rainbow effects Included are various graphic displays and the time of day

Can Assist In Complying with Requirements With The Imparied Centers & Accessories Line Displays 2.25″ (5/82m) H x 19.0 (48.26 cm) W x (12.07 cm) D 3.5 lbs (1.58 kg) V-5332900 to RS/485Connector Kit RS485 Repeater Is Required When More Than 29 Are Used In A Network Or When The Total Distance Exceeds 6,000 Feet. Keyboard V-5332905 programming messages and display of message sign (V-5332100). from 4 Triple A Batteries.Will communicate Visual Message Center from 20 to 30 feet away. a Visual Message Center is Programmed with messages to be displayed other Message Centers the same network can be down loaded with the messages. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Used With The PagePac Plus, Simultaneous Audio & Paging. Ideal for high noise retail advertising or emergency Compatible with RS/232 port of PagePac Plus Controller Capability of one-line display of 2.1 high characters Messages are stored in sign and retained even in power interruptions Display of messages are in 25 attention-getting modes, 8 true colors and 3 rainbow effects Included are various graphic displays and the time of day

Can Assist In Complying with Requirements With The Imparied Centers & Accessories Line Displays 2.25″ (5/82m) H x 19.0 (48.26 cm) W x (12.07 cm) D 3.5 lbs (1.58 kg) V-5332900 to RS/485Connector Kit RS485 Repeater Is Required When More Than 29 Are Used In A Network Or When The Total Distance Exceeds 6,000 Feet. Keyboard V-5332905 programming messages and display of message sign (V-5332100). from 4 Triple A Batteries.Will communicate Visual Message Center from 20 to 30 feet away. a Visual Message Center is Programmed with messages to be displayed other Message Centers the same network can be down loaded with the messages. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Used With The PagePac Plus, Simultaneous Audio & Paging. Ideal for high noise retail advertising or emergency Compatible with RS/232 port of PagePac Plus Controller Capability of one-line display of 2.1 high characters Messages are stored in sign and retained even in power interruptions Display of messages are in 25 attention-getting modes, 8 true colors and 3 rainbow effects Included are various graphic displays and the time of day

PagePac 1 GENERATOR Multi-Tone Generator (MTG) is a compact, versatile generator as well as a Night Bell for a Telephone Six different information tones plus Night Bell are each of which are priority sensitive and individually The Multi-Tone Generator utilizes most paging for all page/all call applications. If the host telephone system does not have a page then a Loop Start Trunk Adapter can be used from the J2 connector to the Loop Start Trunk. Night bell activation by a ringing voltage and/or AC or DC voltages 6 information tones initiated by contact closures Compatible with most paging equipment Tone level adjustment Quick installation with keyboard style terminal strip and modular jacks Interfaces to mechanical or electronic time clocks for 7 sec. tone/alarm Comes with its own 12 VAC power supply that plugs into any 120 VAC, 60 Hz outlet CSA/NRTL Certified Desk, Shelf or Wall mountable 5.5 x 4.5 x 2.0 x 11.4cm x 5.1cm) 2.0 lbs (0.9 kg) Temperature: Humidity: to 50 (14 to 104 to 95% Requirements Nominal 12VAC at 60 Hz. The AC power is provided by a 12 VAC wall plug type external transformer, with the MTG. The AC input power may vary from 95V to 1130V at the wall plug. MTG is CSA/NTRL certified. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Multi-Tone Generator produces five different tones by contact closure. The sixth tone (time clock port) is activated by making, or breaking contacts (see Table 1). Requested tones are switched as by the appropriate contact closure onto the paging audio path and provides a contact closure turn on the connected paging equipment for the duration of the tone request. J5 LEVEL IN OUT 1. Rear View of Multi-Tone Generator 1. Audio Information Tone Siren Siren changes in frequency from 560 Hz to 1050 and back, at a rate of 5 times per second. changes in frequency from 560 Hz to 1050 and back, at a rate of once every 3 seconds. Warble changes in frequency from 560 Hz to 1050 at a rate of 2 times per second. Pulse frequency of 500 Hz, interrupted 5 times per for a period of 30 milliseconds. Tone steady tone with a frequency of 680 Hz. Pulse pulses (same as priority 4) for a duration of 7 upon receipt of an external closing or contact. Bell between a frequency of 800 Hz and 1200 at a rate of 20 times per second. Signal An audio input signal. PIN 10 PIN 9 PIN 8 PIN 7 PIN 6 PIN 5 PIN 1 3 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Bell Functions MTG Night Bell function is activated through J1, Pins 1, 2 and 3 connector (Night Bell). If the signal is a nominal 70 Vac, 20 cycle ringer voltage use Pins 2 & 3. The night bell can also be by a key system generating 10 to 30 volts AC at 60 cycles or it can be driven by 24 to 48 Vdc, polarity on Pins 1 & 2. customer owned phone system audio and control lines are attached to J2 (Page Input) and are unchanged through the MTG to J3 (Page/Tone Output) when it is in the inactive, (Tones/Night Off) state. This mode is referred to as Through The MTG, when accessed, will disconnect from J3 and connect the MTG audio and control lines to J3. 2. Connectors and Pin Identification J1. 10 Pin connector. J2, J3, J4 and J5. Quad RJ11 type connectors. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

PagePac 1 MICROPHONE high fidelity desk microphone provides high low noise single and multi-zone paging to existing paging products. A cardioid element suppresses background noise, is housed on the end of a flexible tube. You page through a momentary push-button for pages, or make a long page with a lock-on Front panel LEDs indicate paging status Figure 1). back panel is shown in Figure 2. An attached socket transformer provides power to the unit. for tip and ring, busy buss, and dry closure are made at a compression screw block. You can adjust the output volume by screwdriver. The multi-zone model has a for selecting dedicated single zone paging. DTMF Pad for Multi-Zone Access Can be Switched to Dedicated Single-Zone Momentary Push or Lock-On Page Button Front Panel LEDs Requirements 120 VAC, 60 Hz Base: 7 x 3 x 5 x 7.62cm x 12.7cm) 14 (35.56cm) 2.50 lbs (1.13 kg) make a short page, press and hold the larger, contact push-button. To make a longer press the smaller locking push-button; when page is over, press this push-button again to On the multi-zone model, use the pad to select zone addresses or implement features; Refer to your Page Controller for zone options. three LEDs on the front panel show paging A flashing yellow LED indicates a long page. The red LED indicates a busy condi- on the system. The green LED indicates that microphone is on and ready to initiate a page when the unit is paging). volume can be adjusted by using the screw- output level at the back panel Figure 2). microphone has rubber feet for placing on a desktop. Connect the transformer to standard 120 VAC 60 Hz wall socket. Figure 3 the wiring connections at the microphone block. Multiple microphones may be to an amplifier in either a star or daisy chain as shown in Figure 4. Choose the that minimizes the length of wiring 5 shows the wiring diagram for connecting to a PagePac D-Series AmpliCenter An additional terminal block is recom- with the star configuration for connecting various incoming wires at the amplifier end. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – The shielding for the wires should NOT be to the GND screw at any microphone the star configuration. The Shield should remain continuous to the of the wire run and should only be grounded the amplifier. 6 shows the wiring diagram for connecting to a Paging Controller Unit. ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 ELECTRET ELEMENT HIGH SUPPRESSION BACKGROUND NOISE INDICATORS PAD FOR ACESS PUSHBUTTON SHORT PAGES PUSHBUTTON LONG PAGES 1. Multi-Zone Microphone Features Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – CONTROL FOR DEDICATED PAGING Zone No. 22700-003 Inc. VA 24019-5056 SCREW BLOCK CONNECTED TO WALL SOCKET PROVIDES 12 VAC 2. Back Panel Controls and Connectors Enlarged View D T PU T U S Y U S S ONT AC T LOSU R E 3. Wiring Connections on Microphone Terminal Block Manuals Online! – Ma

PagePac 1 DIGITAL MESSAGING UNIT Multiple Digital Messaging Unit (MDMU) is a microprocessor digital voice announcement system. It outputs messages through a public address system. Up to messages can be placed in the units digital memory for replay. Up to eight messages can be programmed to in sequence with timed delays. MDMU can store up to 3 minutes and 15 seconds of messages. Voice and audio messages can be into memory through dial-up telephone, microphone interface, or tape input. MDMU is programmed by dial-up telephone DTMF tones.) guide gives installation, recording, and programming steps. Since messages are digitally stored, there are no moving parts, the MDMU should give years of uninterrupted service. Requirements 115 Vac, 60 Hz 16.3 x 1.8 x 9.3 x 4.5cm x 23.5cm) 13.0 lbs (5.9 kg) Temperature: 0 to 40 (32 to 104 Humidity: to 95% Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Mount the MDMU to either a wall, cabinet or a rack (near the paging equipment if possible). VIEW 1. Wall Mounted MDMU PLYWOOD DIGITAL MESSAGING UNIT DETAIL Plus D300 Plus rol ler DIGITAL UNIT NC N ND HEAD POINT 12 – 24 (TYPICAL) DETAIL STRIP 2. Rack Mounted MDMU Connect the MDMU to the telephone system. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – CONNECTOR OPTION ON EQUIPMENT – DIGITAL VOICE ANNOUNCER REGISTRATION No. F4P4LB-16578-AN-N TO USOC RJ11C OR RJ 21X LOAD No. 26 .N.= 0.7B (ac ); 120V AC, 0.1A , 12W 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AND RING FROM STATION 3. MDMU Connection to telephone system Plug the modular cord into connector J1 on MDMU and connect the wires on the other end to the Attendant Access terminals. 4. MDMU Connection to Controller Attendant Access Connect the RJ-21 cable/connector to the MDMU Aux. Interface and to terminal block. For specific pin-out information for this connector refer to Figure 5. 1 through 6 correspond to message starts 1 through 6. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – CONNECTOR OPTION ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EPHONE EQU IPMENT – DIGITAL VOICE ANNOUNCER REGI STRATION No. F4P 4LB-16578-AN-N CT TO USOC RJ11C OR RJ21X LOAD No. 26 .N.= 0.7 B(ac); 6(d c); 120VA C, 0.1A , 12W CONNECTION 66 PUNCHDOWN BLOCK CABLE AND PAIR 3 (-) 3 (+) CLOSURE ACTIVATE #3 TIP RING 1 (-) 1 (C) 1 (+) 1 (NC) 1 (NO) 2 (-) 2 (+) 4 (-) 4 (+) (NC) 5 (-) 5 (+) (NO) 6 (-) 6 (+) (C) REMOTE REMOTE CLOSURE ACTIVATE #1 CLOSURE ACTIVATE #2 CLOSURE ACTIVATE #4 CLOSURE ACTIVATE #5 CLOSURE ACTIVATE #6 5. Connection of RJ-21 cable to MDMU and 66 Punchdown Block Set the MDMU options on the DIP switch. Refer to Table 1. Switches 1, 2 and 3 set the number of messages in a single queue sequence. The timing those messages is set by switches 4, 5 and 6. Switch 7 sets the total possible number of for the unit. Switch 8 is always in the ON position. 6. Set MDMU Options on DIP Switch Manuals Online! –

VSP-V-1016,V-1022C-27C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR AMPLIFIED INTERIOR WALL SPEAKERS V-1016-W V-1024C, V-1026C V-1025C, V-1027C One-Way Amplified Interior Speakers, V-1016-BK, V-1022C, V-1023C, V-1025C, V-1026C, V-1026C-W, are self-amplified and capable of paging as well as background music. speakers have externally accessible volume that are screwdriver adjustable. The are vinyl laminated pressboard with either coordinating cloth or woven can grille. All require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) and FCC Part 68 registered under Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Connections Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the and speaker may occur. A V-1095 may used to allow the use of Valcom self-amplified on 70V speaker lines. mounting heights are 8 to 12 ft. above the floor. V-1016-W, V-1022C, V-1023C: the screw holding the mounting bracket to speaker housing. Mount bracket using appro- hardware such as #8 pan head screws. After the required connections, reattach the speaker to the mounting bracket. V-1016 9.7 x 11.5 x 4.0 H x 29.2cm W x 10.16cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1022C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.04kg) V-1023C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1025C: After making required connec- use appropriate hardware such as an 8d nail to hang the speaker housing in the x 9.5 x 6.3 H x 24.1cm W x 16cm D) lbs. (1.63kg) Manuals Online! – V-1026C-W, V-1027C: Remove wing holding mounting bracket to speaker housing. bracket and mount using appropriate such as #8 pan head screws. Reattach housing to mounting bracket. Remove the 4 holding the reverse side grille to the speaker and remove the grille. After making required reattach the grille to the speaker x 10.3 x 4.2 H x 26.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.54kg) area covered by a wall speaker is typically 600 feet. of Speakers per Audio Run Run (Ft.) AWG AWG of Speakers per Power Run Watt Interior AWG ft. ft. ft. AWG ft. ft. ft. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken Assistance in troubleshooting is from the factory. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. & Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 audio from volume from squeal CHART Check that volume control is turned up (clockwise). Using a lineman’s test set check for the proper audio level on the Tip and Ring and if necessary also at the source. Check that volume control is turned up. Check voltage at the speaker assembly when in use, -18 to -24 Vdc required. Using a lineman’s test set, check for the proper audio level on Tip and Ring It is possible that some low level audio will be heard with only one side of and Ring connected. Turn down (counter-clockwise) volume of the speaker. Add a V-9962 Digital Feedback Eliminator. the distance between the telephone and speaker. a noise canceling handset on the telephone in severe problem areas. Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials

PagePac VOICE PAGING SPEAKERS (VOICE COIL) (70 VOLT) 2 Voice Paging Speakers are suitable for paging as well as background music. The is a 70 volt model with adjustable taps volume control. The V-5330100 is a voice coil Ohm) 3.4 volt model with volume control. speakers consist of a 3.6 inch cone mounted in a unique surface-mount baf- The baffle is designed for mounting on tile, such as those normally found in sus- and can be mounted without large holes in the tile. The mounting pins be removed for mounting in a hard ceiling. speaker housing has screw holes for securing without mounting pins. Although the speakers are designed especially for stan- suspended ceilings, they can be used on types of ceiling materials. 8 x 2.5 (20.32cm x 6.35cm) Coil .75 lbs. (.34 kg) Volt 1.25 lbs. (.56 kg) the Power-Tap Wire (70V) For the V-5330100 Speakers (Voice Coil), begin at Suspended Ceiling Installation. Remove the Quick-Connect connector from accessory pack. Select the desired power-tap wire: = 1/4W 1/2W = 1W = 2W 4W 1. P-TEC Paging Speaker (70V shown) the Quick-Connect connector on the Use pliers to close the connector over wire. The connector can be removed by it open with a screwdriver, and can be several times (see Figure 2). Box (Optional) Control Wire Refer to spacing chart (Figure 6) for recom- speaker spacing. 2. Attaching the Reuseable Quick-Connect Connector (V-5330200 Only) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Connect the power-tap wire to the gold (+) (see Figure 3). Arrange the unused power-tap wires neatly the speaker housing and tape them to inside of the housing. If necessary, adjust paging volume after instal- The volume control is located on the of the speaker. Use a small screwdriver to the control. Install the volume control cover found in the – ) Silver pack. When using a PagePac Amplicenter, volume should be adjusted at the amplifier or music source. Adjust before adjusting background music. Speaker Phasing using multiple speakers in a single run, speakers in phase by connecting the wires to the same spike on each speaker wire can connect on either spike, as long the pattern is followed on each speaker). The spike is the plus (+) terminal (see Figure 5). Next Paging ( + ) 5. Maintaining Speaker Phasing Shielded Speaker Cable Only you are using shielded speaker cable, splice the wire at the speaker location so a continu- shield is maintained. When connecting a sin- speaker, or the last speaker on the run, clip shield wire where it emerges from the outer on the speaker cable. ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. + ) Gold Transformer – Common at Factory) Tap Wires Tap Wires – 1/4 Watt – 1/2 Watt – 1 Watt – 2 Watt – 4 Watt 1/4 Watt 1/2 Watt 1 Watt 2 Watt 4 Watt Wire unused wires inside speaker housing. Figure 3. Connecting the Tap Wire (V-5330200 Only) Ceiling Wrap wires around strain relief posts so speaker wires will not pull free. Lift the adjacent ceiling tile and slide it out of way. Install the speaker by inserting the mounting through the ceiling tile, and hold the in place. Place the wire and washers, and speaker clips over mounting pins (so pins through clips). mounting holes and screws spikes can not be used. 4. P-TEC Installation Washers provi

PagePac VOICE PAGING SPEAKERS (VOICE COIL) (70 VOLT) 2 Voice Paging Speakers are suitable for paging as well as background music. The is a 70 volt model with adjustable taps volume control. The V-5330100 is a voice coil Ohm) 3.4 volt model with volume control. speakers consist of a 3.6 inch cone mounted in a unique surface-mount baf- The baffle is designed for mounting on tile, such as those normally found in sus- and can be mounted without large holes in the tile. The mounting pins be removed for mounting in a hard ceiling. speaker housing has screw holes for securing without mounting pins. Although the speakers are designed especially for stan- suspended ceilings, they can be used on types of ceiling materials. 8 x 2.5 (20.32cm x 6.35cm) Coil .75 lbs. (.34 kg) Volt 1.25 lbs. (.56 kg) the Power-Tap Wire (70V) For the V-5330100 Speakers (Voice Coil), begin at Suspended Ceiling Installation. Remove the Quick-Connect connector from accessory pack. Select the desired power-tap wire: = 1/4W 1/2W = 1W = 2W 4W 1. P-TEC Paging Speaker (70V shown) the Quick-Connect connector on the Use pliers to close the connector over wire. The connector can be removed by it open with a screwdriver, and can be several times (see Figure 2). Box (Optional) Control Wire Refer to spacing chart (Figure 6) for recom- speaker spacing. 2. Attaching the Reuseable Quick-Connect Connector (V-5330200 Only) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Connect the power-tap wire to the gold (+) (see Figure 3). Arrange the unused power-tap wires neatly the speaker housing and tape them to inside of the housing. If necessary, adjust paging volume after instal- The volume control is located on the of the speaker. Use a small screwdriver to the control. Install the volume control cover found in the – ) Silver pack. When using a PagePac Amplicenter, volume should be adjusted at the amplifier or music source. Adjust before adjusting background music. Speaker Phasing using multiple speakers in a single run, speakers in phase by connecting the wires to the same spike on each speaker wire can connect on either spike, as long the pattern is followed on each speaker). The spike is the plus (+) terminal (see Figure 5). Next Paging ( + ) 5. Maintaining Speaker Phasing Shielded Speaker Cable Only you are using shielded speaker cable, splice the wire at the speaker location so a continu- shield is maintained. When connecting a sin- speaker, or the last speaker on the run, clip shield wire where it emerges from the outer on the speaker cable. ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. + ) Gold Transformer – Common at Factory) Tap Wires Tap Wires – 1/4 Watt – 1/2 Watt – 1 Watt – 2 Watt – 4 Watt 1/4 Watt 1/2 Watt 1 Watt 2 Watt 4 Watt Wire unused wires inside speaker housing. Figure 3. Connecting the Tap Wire (V-5330200 Only) Ceiling Wrap wires around strain relief posts so speaker wires will not pull free. Lift the adjacent ceiling tile and slide it out of way. Install the speaker by inserting the mounting through the ceiling tile, and hold the in place. Place the wire and washers, and speaker clips over mounting pins (so pins through clips). mounting holes and screws spikes can not be used. 4. P-TEC Installation Washers provi

PagePac 2 Voice Coil and Volt Door Speaker / V-5330230 Manual Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – PagePac Door Speaker The Door Phone and 6 systems that a Voice Door Speaker be The PagePac 6 system requires a Volt Door Speaker used. (Additional can be added controller and systems Door Speaker operates within a weather resistant enclosure ideal for indoor as well as applications. When used in conjunction with the Door Phone Controller, PagePac 6, PagePac 6 Plus, persons within your office or building can speak directly with outside through the telephone system. sBoth Voice Coil (V-5330120) and ffkfkjskgg kfgjkjgk Volt (V-5330230) models are available. of double-gang electrical boxes, running of conduit, cutting through walls, etc., be conducted by persons with appropriate technical skills; we highly recommended be provided by a licensed electrician. Install per National Electrical Code and any local codes. This manual provides information for installing the Door Speaker to a (surface mount) or nonsolid (flush mount) surface. STAINLESS STEEL WITH FOUR RESISTANT (A SPECIAL ALLEN IS INCLUDED FOR WEATHER ENCLOSURE MEET BUILDING AND CODES. ENCLOSURE IS A OHM (FOR VOICE-COIL OR 70 VOLT TO SIGNALING PagePac Door Speaker Lucent Technologies Door Speaker box contains: speaker unit (steel) resistant double-gang outdoor outlet box gasket, and surface hardware (screws and resistant (faceplate) mounting (four) with driver tool instruction booklet For some wall such as plastic wall may need to be into the wall to secure the screws. Door Speaker can be mounted to virtually any type of surface or wall. Those surfaces that too hard or difficult to cut through require the unit to be SURFACE MOUNTED (device so it is completely external to the wall surface). Wall surfaces such as wood or often are hollow and allow wiring to be run within the wall. Mounting the Door unit to non-solid surfaces is often preferred because the unit can be FLUSH so only the faceplate is exposed. Refer to the following pages for both surface- and flush-mount double-gang outlet box installations. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – MOUNTING BOX : SEAL TOP PLUG OUTDOOR SEALANT AS SILICONE RUBBER BOX RESISTANT OUTDOOR BOX OR CONDUIT A The gang box mounting (included) can be screwed the gang box back plate so they out the sides of the gang Using the appropriate screws on the material the wall is of), position the screws through bracket holes and using a secure the gang box to wall surface. Once the gang box been properly braced, install the unit and face plate as shown illustrations 4 and 5. SCREWS Another method to attach the box to the surface of a wall, is more secure and esthetically pleasing is to drill mounting holes (4) into the back of the gang box. the appropriate screws on the material the wall is made of) position the through the inside of the gang and using a screwdriver secure gang box to the wall. Once the box has been properly braced, the speaker unit and face plate shown in illustrations 4 and 5. gang box be via the to a earth to provide against strikes. MOUNTING… to step 2. conduit and plug be sealed pipe joint for wet not allow to into rear of outlet to avoid with Speaker. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – MOUNTING surface installations often desirable because mounting hardware and wires ar

PagePac 2 6 6 is a compact, 6 watt, voice-paging system that single-zone paging capability to your telephone 6.0 x 2.5 x 3.3 x 6.4cm x 8.3cm) lbs. (0.9 kg) Connects to telephone system through standard modular telephone cords Connects to voice coil speakers or horns Provides a 6-watt, voice coil output Controls background music provided from a line level source Includes 12VAC power supply that plugs into any standard 120VAC, 60 Hz outlet. Connects directly to telephone system page port (Page port must provide a dry contact closure.) Requires separately purchased adapters for telephone systems without page port connections Adapter & PagePal) are several ways to connect PagePac 6 to your telephone system. For telephone systems equipped with a page port that has a contact closure, the PagePac 6 connects to the page port (see Figure 1). For those telephone systems not equipped with a page port, a choice of adapters is available. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – OFFICE port PORT jack SYSTEM 6 1. PagePac 6 Connections to Telephone System Equipped Page Port and a Contact Closure PAGEPAC 6 TO A PAGE PORT WITH A CONTACT CLOSURE PROCEDURE PagePac 6 can be placed on a desk or shelf, or wall-mounted using the keyhole slot in the bottom of unit. Circled numbers in Figure 2 correspond to the steps in the following installation procedures. SYSTEM JACK COVERS NOT SHOWN Two ESD covers are provided for SPEAKER/MUSIC IN terminal and the AUX connector. Remove covers prior to installation and when installation is complete. 120 VAC Hz MODULAR CORD 3. Connections to a Page Port with RJ11 Jack selecting a convenient location: Connect the page jack on the PagePac 6 to the telephone system page jack with a modular cord. the page port has screw-type connections, use a half-modular cord to connect to the page The modular end of the cord connects to the PagePac 6 PAGE jack. On the other end of cord, the green lead to page tip, and the red lead connects to page ring. The black and leads are control leads that connect to a dry contact closure provided by the page port. Plug the PagePac 6 power cord into a standard AC wall outlet. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – The Canadian equivalent to the RJ11C connector is CA11A. Where applicable, CA11A is to be for other references to RJ11C in this manual. PAGEPAC 6 USING A PAGEPAC TRUNK ADAPTER PROCEDURE selecting a convenient location: Trunk Adapter connects PagePac 6 to vacant CO line port of telephone system. Circled in Figure 3 correspond to the steps in the installation procedure. Connect the Trunk Adapter modular cord to the PagePac 6 PAGE jack. Connect the Trunk Adapter power cord to the PagePac 6 POWER OUT jack. Connect the Trunk Adapter jack J2 to the telephone system trunk line jack (the jack which will be for paging) with a standard modular cord. Plug the PagePac 6 power cord into a standard AC wall outlet. 6 MUSIC IN ADAPTER ADAPTER No 22050-900 JACK 120 VAC Hz COVER NOT SHOWN 3. Connections to a Line Jack Using the PagePac Trunk Adapter PAGEPAC 6 USING A PAGEPAL PROCEDURE selecting a convenient location: Add PagePal to PagePac 6 installation for Override page access, alert tones, CO port or Station access, or night bell. Connect terminal 13 of PagePal to green (pin 4) of PagePac 6. Connect terminal 15 of PagePal to red (pin 3) of PagePac 6. Connect terminal 16 of PagePal to yellow (pin 5) of PagePac 6. Connect terminal 17 of PagePal to black (pin 2) of PagePac 6. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – 6 System B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1

PagePac 1 6 PLUS OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 the PagePac 6 Plus With One or Telephone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Speakers to PagePac 6 Plus . . . . . . . . 5 — And How to Select Them . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 You Hear — And What They Mean . . . . . . . 8-9 to Adjust Page, Talkback and Music Volume. 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Regulations / CSA Information . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 6 Plus is a compact, 6-watt, voice-paging system that integrates three paging zones, each talkback capability, into your telephone system. PagePac 6 Plus can be used with most telephone from single-line residential systems to electronic key and PBX systems. Works with either one or two lines, and provides two separate paging accesses when used with two Provides three separate paging zones, each with a 2-watt output, as well as call paging and zone Talkback is available in all three zones Supports both standard (indoor) and horn (outdoor) speakers. with voice coil speakers only. FCC and CSA approved Controls background music in all three zones (music must be provided from a separate source, such an external music source, FM tuner, a tape deck, or leased source). See Note. Comes with its own 12-VAC power supply and plugs into any standard 120-VAC, 60 Hz outlet User options are telephone dial selected (DTMF or Pulse) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Those who use paging systems to rebroadcast copyrighted music are required to obtain licenses and pay fees to copyright owners. This usually involves obtaining licenses and paying fees to either and/ or BMI (American Society of Composers, Artists and Producers, Broadcast Music Inc.). It is user obligation to obtain any license required and pay any fees. 9.70 x 8.60 x 1.50 24.64cm x 21.84cm x 3.81) 0.194 lbs (.087 kg) SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS important Secondary Circuit Protection information refer to pages 13-14. using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following: Read and understand all instructions. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious to the product. Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect it overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be by placing the product on the bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a installation unless proper ventilation is provided. This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your dealer or local power RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, EQUIPMENT MUST BE PROPERLY Your equipment requires a properly grounded three-prong power receptacle for safe Have the receptacle checked by a qualified electrician before connecting this equipment. not cut or remove the third (ground) prong from the power transformer. Do not use two-prong cords or adapters to defeat the safety features of this equipment. If you have a two-prong it must be replaced with a three-prong receptacle, installed by a qualified electrician.

PagePac USER GUIDE 6 Plus Voice Paging System AN OUTSIDE CALL the receiver. 9, or wait for Automatic Outside Line Access (see program- instructions below). Listen for dial tone. number. receiver when call is completed. the receiver, listen for PagePac 6 Plus dial tone. the zone code (see figure 1), listen for connection tone, if (see programming instructions below). page. replace the receiver. OPTIONS lift the receiver. You will receive PagePac 6 Plus dial tone, then fol- the instructions below. The tone you will hear after each step is in parenthesis, example-(program tone). If you get a fast busy hang up and start over. Indicates the default condition. Tone In Zones On Line I And Line 2 in Zone 1 ON, dial 811 (program tone). in Zone 2 ON, dial 812 (program tone). in Zone 3 ON, dial 813 (program tone). in all zones OFF*, dial 814 (program tone). on Line 1 OFF, dial 891 (program tone). on Line 2 OFF, dial 892 (program tone). on Lines 1 and 2 ON*, dial 893 (program tone). tone ON*, dial 835 (program tone). tone OFF, dial 834 (program tone). Warning tone OFF, dial 831 (program tone). Warning tones OFF, dial 832 (program tone). Warning tones ON*, dial 833 (program tone). between Repetitive tone 15 SECONDS, dial 841 (programtone). between Repetitive tone 30 SECONDS*, dial 842 (program tone). in Zone 1 OFF, dial 821 (program tone). in Zone 2 OFF, dial 822 (program tone). in Zone 3 OFF, dial 823 (program tone). in all zones ON*, dial 824 (program tone). In Zones Warning Tones Zone Paging Outside Line Access On Line 1 OFF, dial 861 (program tone). after 2 SECONDS, dial 862 (program tone). after 4 SECONDS*, dial 863 (program tone). after 10 SECONDS, dial 864 (program tone). Outside Line Access On Line 2 OFF, dial 865 (program tone). after 2 SECONDS, dial 866 (program tone). after 4 SECONDS*, dial 867 (program tone). after 10 SECONDS, dial 868 (program tone). paging OFF, dial 851 (program zone). paging ON*, dial 852 (program tone). 1. PAGEPAC 6 PLUS ZONE DIAL CODES DIAL CODES # Zones and 3 and 3 and 2 Inc. VA, USA 427-3900 / www.valcom.com 1 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac 2 Plus AmpliCenter and Use Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Steps If installed next to other including the Plus Controller and Expansion Units, leave least four inches space and below for proper Mount the PagePac Plus AmpliCenter to either the wall 1), cabinet, or a 19 inch rack (Figure 2). VIEW – 120 VAC – 240 VAC – 60 Hz 1. Wall Mounted Hardware DETAIL PlusR D300 PlusR Center D300 HEAD POINT 10 – 32 (TYPICAL) DETAIL STRIP 2. Rack Mounted Hardware Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Connect music input wires to Left, Right, and Ground terminals, if stereo, or Left Ground, if not (see Figure 3). 3. Music Input Connections on AmpliCenter Hookup speaker cable to AmpliCenter (see Figure 4). The optional audio music source can be CD or tape player, AM, FM, or radio, or other audio If more than one speaker cable routed to the AmpliCenter, a block is necessary. to sample wiring diagrams on 8. It is recommended that shielded wire be used. NOT hook up speaker wires with power plug connected! 4. Speaker Connection on AmpliCenter Connect host telephone system to Amplicenter (see Figure 5). Set the AmpliCenter Telephone Mode Selection Switch (see Figure 6) to match the output type of your telephone system. power cord into AmpliCenter and into wall outlet (see Figure 7). Test paging zone served by the AmpliCenter by dialing paging telephone extension use microphone. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Connect the 4-wire RJ-11 plug (used with telephones) to Page Input connector (far or use the Page in Tip and Ring if installing to an paging system (low output), VOX activated. Tip and Ring if connecting to Loop Start or Ground Start port in host telephone a microphone, hook the mic to C1 and Grd, and the mic to Tip and Ring. (cid:11) 5. Host Telephone System Connection 6. Telephone Mode Switch Setting Do not use extension or plug into locally, outlets. – 120 VAC – 2 0 VAC – 60 Hz 7. Power Cable Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac 2 Plus AmpliCenter and Use Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Steps If installed next to other including the Plus Controller and Expansion Units, leave least four inches space and below for proper Mount the PagePac Plus AmpliCenter to either the wall 1), cabinet, or a 19 inch rack (Figure 2). VIEW – 120 VAC – 240 VAC – 60 Hz 1. Wall Mounted Hardware DETAIL PlusR D300 PlusR Center D300 HEAD POINT 10 – 32 (TYPICAL) DETAIL STRIP 2. Rack Mounted Hardware Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Connect music input wires to Left, Right, and Ground terminals, if stereo, or Left Ground, if not (see Figure 3). 3. Music Input Connections on AmpliCenter Hookup speaker cable to AmpliCenter (see Figure 4). The optional audio music source can be CD or tape player, AM, FM, or radio, or other audio If more than one speaker cable routed to the AmpliCenter, a block is necessary. to sample wiring diagrams on 8. It is recommended that shielded wire be used. NOT hook up speaker wires with power plug connected! 4. Speaker Connection on AmpliCenter Connect host telephone system to Amplicenter (see Figure 5). Set the AmpliCenter Telephone Mode Selection Switch (see Figure 6) to match the output type of your telephone system. power cord into AmpliCenter and into wall outlet (see Figure 7). Test paging zone served by the AmpliCenter by dialing paging telephone extension use microphone. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Connect the 4-wire RJ-11 plug (used with telephones) to Page Input connector (far or use the Page in Tip and Ring if installing to an paging system (low output), VOX activated. Tip and Ring if connecting to Loop Start or Ground Start port in host telephone a microphone, hook the mic to C1 and Grd, and the mic to Tip and Ring. (cid:11) 5. Host Telephone System Connection 6. Telephone Mode Switch Setting Do not use extension or plug into locally, outlets. – 120 VAC – 2 0 VAC – 60 Hz 7. Power Cable Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac 2 Plus AmpliCenter and Use Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Steps If installed next to other including the Plus Controller and Expansion Units, leave least four inches space and below for proper Mount the PagePac Plus AmpliCenter to either the wall 1), cabinet, or a 19 inch rack (Figure 2). VIEW – 120 VAC – 240 VAC – 60 Hz 1. Wall Mounted Hardware DETAIL PlusR D300 PlusR Center D300 HEAD POINT 10 – 32 (TYPICAL) DETAIL STRIP 2. Rack Mounted Hardware Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Connect music input wires to Left, Right, and Ground terminals, if stereo, or Left Ground, if not (see Figure 3). 3. Music Input Connections on AmpliCenter Hookup speaker cable to AmpliCenter (see Figure 4). The optional audio music source can be CD or tape player, AM, FM, or radio, or other audio If more than one speaker cable routed to the AmpliCenter, a block is necessary. to sample wiring diagrams on 8. It is recommended that shielded wire be used. NOT hook up speaker wires with power plug connected! 4. Speaker Connection on AmpliCenter Connect host telephone system to Amplicenter (see Figure 5). Set the AmpliCenter Telephone Mode Selection Switch (see Figure 6) to match the output type of your telephone system. power cord into AmpliCenter and into wall outlet (see Figure 7). Test paging zone served by the AmpliCenter by dialing paging telephone extension use microphone. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Connect the 4-wire RJ-11 plug (used with telephones) to Page Input connector (far or use the Page in Tip and Ring if installing to an paging system (low output), VOX activated. Tip and Ring if connecting to Loop Start or Ground Start port in host telephone a microphone, hook the mic to C1 and Grd, and the mic to Tip and Ring. (cid:11) 5. Host Telephone System Connection 6. Telephone Mode Switch Setting Do not use extension or plug into locally, outlets. – 120 VAC – 2 0 VAC – 60 Hz 7. Power Cable Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac 2 PagePal unit interfaces most telephone sys- (PBX, KTS, Centrex) to virtually any public audio system. addition, PagePal furnishes inputs for customer background music and auxiliary inputs as an attendant microphone, a radio recorded announcements). Control are provided for tones generated by the PagePal can be placed on a desk or or mounted to a wall. Only line level microphones may be used PagePal. Access from: Loop start trunk port Ground start trunk port Analog PBX station, Centrex or CO lines Dry loop page ports (4-wire) with contact closure controls to set attendant input and back- music, relative to telephone level Simplified connections via modular telephone and lugless terminal block Requirements power supply plugs into standard AC x 6.0 x 4.0 x 15.3cm x 10.2cm) lbs. (0.9 kg) Humidity: 0 to 40 (32 to 104 to 95% are routed to the output with the following (highest to lowest): Attendant access for emergency announce- Telephone Access for general paging. Alert Tone 1 (siren) for evacuation warning. Alert Tone 2 (chime) for time clock, door bell, alert, etc. Night bell for after-hours calls to ring over the address system. Music input for background music. Override or busy tone is returned to the tele- user if a higher priority input is active. Call confirmation and preannouncement tones be optioned. An optional contact closure output is provided control auxiliary equipment (music/page recorder logging, etc.). Station access mode features: VOX (Voice Operated Switch) Maximum length off-hook timer. Responds to open loop disconnect). Dial tone detection and disconnect. Loop Start Supervised (LSS) access mode VOX and maximum length off-hook for use with a Loop Start Trunk Port. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Output level of output. Full clockwise rotation 14 dBm gain. the Main Output level first using telephone then adjust Attendant and Music Inputs for appropriate relative level. Input level of Attendant Input relative to the Input. Adjustment range is from 0 dBm less than -30 dBm. Input level of Music Input relative to the Tele- Input. Adjustment range is from 0 dBm to than -30 dBm. ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at http:// and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Repair Dept. Inc. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Access / Switch Settings four position slide switch is used to select the access mode. Loop Start with a Loop Start Trunk Port of a PBX or System, or a dedicated phone set. Start/Loop Start Supervised from a PBX Ground Start Trunk Port. this mode, the PBX ground must be con- to pin 1 of the 20-pin connector on the or pin 2 of the RJ11 connector on PagePal. Loop Start Supervised mode, pin 7 of the must be connected to pin 1 on the connector to allow supervision of the Start Trunk Port. The PagePal will super- the connection, and will automatically dis- the line if no voice is detected on the for 20 seconds or if the line remains active hook) for more than one minute. Station Access with a standard (ANALOG) station port a CENTREX, PBX, Key System, or Central subscriber line. Use a two-wire RJ11 in this mode. The PagePal receives talk and ring voltage from the host system. Dry Loop with the Page Port of a PBX or Key or an Auxiliary port of a PBX. This shall respond to resistances from 0 to 1K and will ignore resistance greater t

PagePac 1 PLUS DOOR PHONE PARTNER Plus Door Phone is a hands- door phone unit designed specifically to com- with the PARTNER Plus telephone The PARTNER Plus Door Phone can ring to 5 telephone extensions, or access an auxil- alert device such as a door bell/chime. PARTNER Plus Door Phone operates within weather resistant enclosure ideal for indoor as as outdoor applications. Once the door phone installed, persons within your office or building speak directly with outside visitors Push Button – to initiate signalling LED – lights up to indicate activation Two-way hands-free voice communication Silent monitor capability Volume Control – adjusts speaker volume No external power required Stainless steel faceplate with tamper resistant Weather resistant enclosure VOX circuit – to turn unit off with lack of voice 4.63 x 4.63 x 1.75 x 11.76cm x 4.45cm) 1.52 lbs. (0.68 kg) with gang box 0.72 lbs. (0.32 kg) without gang box activation of the PARTNER Plus Door push button will cause the telephone Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – to dial the numbers of up to 5 telephone (programmed in the PARTNER Plus tele- system). When the telephone is answered, is direct two-way communication with the visitor. When the PARTNER Plus Door push button is pressed by a visitor, the light the face plate will go on, the door phone will go and the PARTNER Plus will respond with pong tone and dial the extension(s) which been programmed. Upon hearing the ringing the person inside the building picks up telephone receiver and is in direct contact with door phone. To contact the door phone from the building, simply dial the programmed Phone extension number. The jumper plug on the back panel of the Plus Door Phone must be in the RING- position for proper operation. Alert PARTNER Plus Door Phone can be optioned use an Auxiliary Alert device (such as a door or chime) instead of ringing a telephone. VOX Operation PARTNER Plus Door Phone is equipped with VOX (voice activated switch) circuit. This feature provided to automatically drop communications the door speaker when there is no talking method to attach the gang box to the sur- of a wall, which is more secure and provides aesthetically pleasing look, is to drill mounting (4) directly into the back of the gang box. the appropriate screws (depending on the the wall surface is made of) position the through the inside of the gang box and a screwdriver secure the gang box to the (see Figure 1). For some wall surfaces, such as drywall, wall anchors may need to be driven into wall surface to secure the mounting screws. from the telephone extension within the Visitors talking into the door speaker will affect the VOX circuit. When the VOX circuit detects silence from telephone extension for more than 24 seconds The PARTNER Plus Door Phone will YOU BEGIN determining the best location for mounting PARTNER Plus Door Phone unit, you should the following points first: The unit should be mounted close to the door it can be located and accessed easily. Is the wall which has been selected for mounting PARTNER Plus Door Phone unit solid (con- brick, stone, etc.)? If so, the unit is more surface mounted in the provided outdoor- electrical box with conduit used outdoors to the wires connected to the PARTNER Plus Phone unit (refer to Surface Mount Wall in this section). If the wall is not solid, PARTNER Plus Door Phone unit can be mounted in an indoor-type electrical box, the wires running inside the wall (see Figure Will the location you have selected for installa- provide for the simplest routing of wires or (if necessary)? Does the PARTNER Plus telephone system available station ports to interface with the Plus Door Phone? CONSIDERATIONS first step when installing the PARTNER Plus Phone is to determine where it will be and how the

PagePac 1 PLUS CONTROLLER (V-5323100) AND WITH POWER SUPPLY (V-5323105) PagePac Plus System consists of the Controller, and up to 3 Zone Expansion Units, providing to 56 paging and/or control zones. The self-powered comes with its own power supply, enabling it to paging and control zones utilizing a paging amplifier than the AmpliCenter. 16.0 x 1.8 x 6.9 x 4.5cm x 17.5cm) lbs. (0.9 kg) 8 Zones Paging or Control Contact Closure Inputs or Outputs Loop Start, Ground Start, CO Port, Analog Station Dry Loop Access Controller with Power Supply for Applications with Night Bell 7 Alert Tones Page Zone Groups Flexible Numbering Plan Amplified Speakers or Amplifiers other than PagePac Mount the PagePac Plus Controller and Zone Expansion Units, if any, to either a wall Figure 1), cabinet or a rack (below the AmpliCenter or other amplifier) (see Figure 2). When installing the PagePac Plus Controller, leave at least four inches of space above and below proper ventilation. the paging equipment in a ventilated room where there is easy access to speaker cabling (prefer- in the telephone equipment room). Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – 1. Wall Mounted Hardware 2. Rack Mounted Hardware Connect background music input wires to Left and Right terminals if stereo, or, Left and Ground if not. Figure 3. The optional audio source can be a CD or tape player, AM, FM, or commercial radio, or other device. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – more than one AmpliCenter is used in the paging system, each one can be connected to the same source, or different audio device, if desired. 3. Music Input Connections on AmpliCenter Plug modular cord into connectors Amp on Controller and In on AmpliCenter Figure 4). If an amplifier other than the AmpliCenter is used, refer to page 10. There you will find wiring dia- and notes. 4. Page In Connection from Controller to AmpliCenter Connect 8-pin Molex connector from AmpliCenter to Controller (see Figure 5). Connectors can only go in one way. DO NOT force in. you are using another type of amplifier, refer to the example system setups. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – 5. 8-pin Molex Connector from AmpliCenter to Controller to Controller will occur if the Molex connector (from AmpliCenter) is into the right connector (This goes to Zone Expansion Units). Set the AmpliCenter Telephone Mode Selection Switch to Dry Loop 600 Ohms (Far left setting). Figure 6. 6. AmpliCenter Mode Switch Setting Connect 8-pin Molex from Controller to Zone Expansion Unit(s), if used. See Figure 7. Up to 3 Zone Expansion Units can be used, providing up to 56 paging and/or control zones. 7. 8-pin Molex Connector from Controller to Zone Expansion Unit(s) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Set DIP switches on each Zone Expansion Unit, if any. See Figure 8. These DIP switches must be set correctly in order for the Controller to recognize the additional 8. Setting Zone Expansion Unit DIP Switches Using a small standard screwdriver, make the following adjustments: Adjust the Low Frequency Cut Off control to center position. This control cuts out the low fre- bass so that horns and small speakers are not over-driven and distorted by excessive energy. Cut-off frequency is continuously adjustable from 50Hz (full CCW rotation) to 400 Hz CW rotation). See Figure 9. Adjust the Page VOX (voice activated) sensitivity to the fully counterclockwise position. Adjust Music Input level to the center position. Clockwise rotation will increase the level. Listen set to a comfortable level. Adjust Music Ducking level to the fully counterclockwise position. This feature allows music to to be heard during a page, but at a reduced level. The range is less than dB (full to dB (full CW). If music is not connected, set to full CCW. 9. Sound Level Adjustments on AmpliCenter Manuals Online! – Manua

PagePac 2 ROUND CEILING BACKBOX (V-5335030-5) back of Recessed Round Ceiling Speaker (V-5330115 & V-5330215). with all fire codes in air plenum applications. x 4.0 (31.24cm x 10.16cm) lbs. (0.9 kg) Cut an eight and one-half inch square hole in ceiling tile using the support bridge as a template. Bend up the four horseshoe tabs on the support bridge. Position the support bridge on the tile and bend the eight locator tabs into the tile opening. Install the UL listed metallic enclosure entry fitting to the knockout to accommodate plenum or fitting for conduit. of the bridge. Install the enclosure to the bridge by orienting the four enclosure slots over the four horseshoe With pliers, twist the four horseshoe tabs on the bridge one-half turn, securing the enclosure to bridge. (Note: Four slots provided on each enclosure to mate with four twist tabs on support eliminates need for screws.) the speaker/baffle assembly with the four 8-32 screws. are provided with the assembly.) Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Category UUMW. Material and construction per- use where ceiling plenum is part of the air handling system. Compound knockout(s) provided for listed type metallic type fittings for one-half inch and inch plenum rated cable and plenum whip flex conduit. All cable splices and connections to speaker/transformer pigtails must be made inside of enclosure. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test set available and call from the job site. (540) 427-3900 and ask for PagePac Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24- Automated Support or visit our websites at http://www.pagepac.com and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the problem. Send the unit to: Repair Dept. Inc. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 (4) SPEAKER POSITION CUT OUT POSITION) SPEAKER POSITION THE BRIDGE SUP- AS A TEMPLATE, MARK SQUARE OPENING IN THE TILE AS SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION. REMOVE BRIDGE SUPPORT AND OUT THE SQUARE WITH UTILITY KNIFE. SUPPORT 1 2′ X 4′ TILE TAB SUPPORT BRIDGE REMOVE THE J-NUTS FROM BACKBOX. KNOCK-OUT HOLE THE BACKBOX ONTO THE SUPPORT AS SHOWN AND HORSESHOE TABS TO SECURE INTO PLACE. TAB (4) WIRE Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – 2

SQ UAR E SPEAKER T PO SITIO N UTSID E C U T O U T PO SITIO N ) O U N D SPEAKER T PO SITIO N (cid:1) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac 1 AMPLIFIER ADAPTER PagePac Remote Amplifier Adapter pro- a method of extending the speaker cover- of your PagePac paging system, by using an PagePac 6 or AmpliCenter as a remote at remote or off-site locations. Note that adapter can not be connected to a 70V output. example, the Remote Amplifier Adapter may connected to a voice coil speaker cable at the or at the end of the cable run as appro- If used at the end of the run, the Adapter cord (P2) is connected to the PAGE Jack (J1) on the unit. If used at start of the run, four wires are used to connect remote amplifier. The page signals from the unit are now available from the remote Adapters may also be used with systems that talkback and zone paging. Music is avail- to the remote unit from the main unit only if Remote Amplifier Adapter is connected to the input of the remote unit. Screw-type Terminals, modular cord and RCA connector 4 x 2 x 5.08cm) .0132 lbs (.059 kg) Refer to Secondary Circuit Protec- Information. Remote Adapter has been designed to voice coil outputs (3.4 volt system) to 6 or D-Series AmpliCenter units which located in separate buildings or when the units separated by 2,000 feet or more. To accom- the potential power loss of large dis- the output of the Remote Amplifier is 7 db than the INPUT of remote D-Series Amplicenter. When connect- two D-Series Amplicenter units, which are the same building or within 2,000 feet of other, the remote PagePac may be over- by the first. To alleviate this potential prob- a 200 Ohm 1/4 watt resistor has been with each Remote Amplifier Adapter to the (Ring terminal. Attach this across the and the (Tip and Ring) when the two PagePac 6 or D-Series units are within the same building (or located less than 2,000 feet from each other). 200 Ohm resistor should not be attached the remote Amplicenter is in another build- or further than 2,000 feet from the first Ampli- install a Remote Amplifier Adapter, make the shown in Figure 1. A description of screw-type terminals located on the adapter is in Table 1. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 CIRCUIT Information equipment is for use on telephone wiring a secondary circuit protector. This pag- equipment requires a Secondary Circuit Pro- where applicable (see Figure 2). secondary circuit protector must be located the primary protector and the paging Refer to the Safety Information below. Information The Secondary Circuit Protector is used when paging equipment directly to lines that may be exposed to high power lines. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning Never install telephone jacks in wet locations the jack is specifically designed for wet Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or ter- unless the telephone line has been dis- at the network interface. Use caution when installing or modifying tele- lines. Use applicable Valcom approved device. Terminal terminals provide a voice-coil speaker output from the primary Amplicenter or Speakers may be connected to these terminals or these terminals can be used your input to the Remote Amplifier Adapter when an RCA cable is not used to connect the primary PagePac. C and C1 are control leads for the re

SQ UAR E SPEAKER T PO SITIO N UTSID E C U T O U T PO SITIO N ) O U N D SPEAKER T PO SITIO N (cid:1) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

1 (cid:1) (cid:22) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

1 (cid:1) (cid:22) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac 2 ADAPTER Trunk Adapter interfaces a loop-start trunk key system line port, or stand alone tele- set to page controls that do not provide a port access input. Requirements -24VDC @ 37mA 4.0 x 2.0 x 1.0 x 5.1cm x 2.5cm) 2.0 lbs (0.9 kg) Adapter connections are shown in Figure 1. to the manuals supplied with each paging for more information. Table 1 lists the Adapter/AmpliCenter connections. not connect a Trunk Adapter manufactured July 1988 to an Amplicenter. Doing so may the Trunk Adapter. See the Trunk front panel for the date of manufacture. ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – 6 MUSIC IN ADAPTER ADAPTER No 22050-900 120 VAC Hz COVER NOT SHOWN 1. PagePac 6 and PagePac Trunk Adapter to Telephone System Line Port JACK Type for Port Technical Support for information on connecting the Trunk Adapter to other page control units. 1. Trunk Adapter/Amplicenter Connections To VDC IN IN Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

1 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

1 R VO LUM E CO NTRO L REW O U NTIN G AC KET NNECT SPEAKER IRES HER E Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

PagePac 1 Door Phone Controller and Operation Manual Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – This Manual PagePac Door Phone Controller You Should Know Procedures Safety Instructions Information Phone Controller Back Panel Connections To Installation Door Phone Controller Location Door Speaker, Door Button, Door Ajar Switch to the PagePac Door Controller Power and Controls Information the Door Phone Controller Your Telephone Equipment for Home/Residential Saver Mode – Loop Start) Switch Selections Selection Basic Door Answer Function Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – for Telephone System With Dedicated Trunk Port Switch Selections Selection Basic Door Answer Function for PBX Equipment Available Station Port Switch Selections Selection for Telephone System Without Available Trunk/Station Port DIP Switch Selections Selection Saver or Trunk Saver Mode Installation Basic Door Answer Function and Technical Assistance Procedures Assistance iii Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – A Switch Settings B Selection Mode Definitions C D the PagePac Door Phone Controller An Answering Machine E Alert Option F Circuit Protection G Regulations, CSA Information Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – This Manual PagePac Door Phone Controller You Should Know 1-1 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – This Manual manual will help you install, program and operate the PagePac Door Controller. It contains important information on what features are and how to use them. We urge you to read this manual prior to the Door Phone Controller; this will ensure that you are using the to its fullest capability. 1 (this section) provides basic information on what the Door Controller is and what are its features. Also included is a Glossary Terms, a necessity for persons not familiar with telephone equipment and installation. 2, Installation, provides important installation information. This has step-by-step procedures for connecting the Door Phone to such optional equipment as door unlocking devices. ajar switch. alert device. open button. 2 also provides an easy to use flow chart, which directs the to the next appropriate section, depending on what type of equipment (residential, PBX, etc.) will be used along with your Phone Controller. 3 through 6 after reading Section 2 and the flow chart at the of that section, the installer is referred to one of these sections. on which section is referenced, all the necessary programming, setting and operating information will also be included. 7 provides troubleshooting tips for when installation is complete the Door Phone Controller is not operating correctly. Reference Chart at the end of this manual provides all the necessary

PagePac 2 Voice Coil and Volt Door Speaker / V-5330230 Manual Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – PagePac Door Speaker The Door Phone and 6 systems that a Voice Door Speaker be The PagePac 6 system requires a Volt Door Speaker used. (Additional can be added controller and systems Door Speaker operates within a weather resistant enclosure ideal for indoor as well as applications. When used in conjunction with the Door Phone Controller, PagePac 6, PagePac 6 Plus, persons within your office or building can speak directly with outside through the telephone system. sBoth Voice Coil (V-5330120) and ffkfkjskgg kfgjkjgk Volt (V-5330230) models are available. of double-gang electrical boxes, running of conduit, cutting through walls, etc., be conducted by persons with appropriate technical skills; we highly recommended be provided by a licensed electrician. Install per National Electrical Code and any local codes. This manual provides information for installing the Door Speaker to a (surface mount) or nonsolid (flush mount) surface. STAINLESS STEEL WITH FOUR RESISTANT (A SPECIAL ALLEN IS INCLUDED FOR WEATHER ENCLOSURE MEET BUILDING AND CODES. ENCLOSURE IS A OHM (FOR VOICE-COIL OR 70 VOLT TO SIGNALING PagePac Door Speaker Lucent Technologies Door Speaker box contains: speaker unit (steel) resistant double-gang outdoor outlet box gasket, and surface hardware (screws and resistant (faceplate) mounting (four) with driver tool instruction booklet For some wall such as plastic wall may need to be into the wall to secure the screws. Door Speaker can be mounted to virtually any type of surface or wall. Those surfaces that too hard or difficult to cut through require the unit to be SURFACE MOUNTED (device so it is completely external to the wall surface). Wall surfaces such as wood or often are hollow and allow wiring to be run within the wall. Mounting the Door unit to non-solid surfaces is often preferred because the unit can be FLUSH so only the faceplate is exposed. Refer to the following pages for both surface- and flush-mount double-gang outlet box installations. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – MOUNTING BOX : SEAL TOP PLUG OUTDOOR SEALANT AS SILICONE RUBBER BOX RESISTANT OUTDOOR BOX OR CONDUIT A The gang box mounting (included) can be screwed the gang box back plate so they out the sides of the gang Using the appropriate screws on the material the wall is of), position the screws through bracket holes and using a secure the gang box to wall surface. Once the gang box been properly braced, install the unit and face plate as shown illustrations 4 and 5. SCREWS Another method to attach the box to the surface of a wall, is more secure and esthetically pleasing is to drill mounting holes (4) into the back of the gang box. the appropriate screws on the material the wall is made of) position the through the inside of the gang and using a screwdriver secure gang box to the wall. Once the box has been properly braced, the speaker unit and face plate shown in illustrations 4 and 5. gang box be via the to a earth to provide against strikes. MOUNTING… to step 2. conduit and plug be sealed pipe joint for wet not allow to into rear of outlet to avoid with Speaker. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – MOUNTING surface installations often desirable because mounting hardware and wires ar

VSP-V-1011/V-1012 5 AMPLIFIED RECESSED CEILING SPEAKERS AMPLIFIED RECESSED CEILING SPEAKERS instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate and maintain Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers. and installation information for the rings and backboxes used with these is also included in this document. speakers are for use with any Valcom page and are for interior use only. Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers are used provide one-way paging when used with a low audio input. Valcom Paging Adapters Electronic Key System Page Ports (interface may be required) PABX Page Ports (interface adapter may be Stand Alone Systems Existing 70V Paging Systems Background Music Systems Self-contained amplifier and volume control Operates on -24VDC Screw terminals for all connections Grille simulates recessed lighting fixture No visible mounting hardware due to concealed studs for the speaker and torsion Specifications Amplifier Input Impedance Amplifier Input Level Amplifier Output Ohm nominal nominal watt into 45 Ohm load Requirements to 50 degrees C to 85% non-precipitating V-1011BB – 4″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Dia x 5.0 (19.81cm Dia. x 12.7cm D) lbs. (2.63 kg) V-1011MR – 4″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Ring Dia x 5.0 (19.81cm Dia. x 12.7cm D) lbs. (1.09 kg) V-1012BB – 8″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Dia x 6.0 Dia. x 15.24cm D) lbs. (2.86 kg) Ring Dia x 6.0 Dia. x 15.24cm D) lbs. (1.50 kg) V-1012MR – 8″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Manuals Online! – DESIGN Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers may be to provide one-way paging from any Valcom or talkback page control. The speakers can be used to expand existing 70V paging systems. power and appropriate input signal are applied, voice page can be made. Control Access Figure 1) using the Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers a Valcom page control, the following equipment be required: Appropriate one-way speaker assembly Valcom page control Valcom power supply sized to provide power to the amplified speaker assemblies and control When using the Valcom one-way interior with a Valcom handsfree page control, it recommended that a V-1092 Volume Control be between the zone output and the input. or 70V Paging Systems Figure 2) using the Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers an existing 25 or 70V paging system, the equipment will be required: Appropriate one-way speaker assembly Valcom power supply sized to provide power to the amplified speaker assemblies or 70V line transformer tapped at 1/4 watt an 8 ohm output Valcom V-1094A Page Port Preamp/Expander Applications Tip and Ring input of the amplified speaker may connected directly to the speaker in most key telephones to amplify the level of the A power supply is also required. Cabling Valcom amplified one-way interior speakers 2 pairs to operate. Standard telephone station may be used. Existing telephone wire and cables may also be used. Refer to the tables when planning an installation. Audio Pair: The number of speakers looped on audio pair is not critical unless you have a large job. Table 1 gives guidelines for the of speakers per audio run. 1 – Number of Speakers per Audio Run AWG Run (Ft) AWG Power Pair: The cable runs specified in Table 2 very important and must be followed for operation of the one-way paging speakers. 2 – Number of Speakers per Power Run AWG) Run (Ft) Watt Inside Speakers area covered by Valcom Recessed Ceiling

VSP-V-1011/V-1012 5 AMPLIFIED RECESSED CEILING SPEAKERS AMPLIFIED RECESSED CEILING SPEAKERS instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate and maintain Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers. and installation information for the rings and backboxes used with these is also included in this document. speakers are for use with any Valcom page and are for interior use only. Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers are used provide one-way paging when used with a low audio input. Valcom Paging Adapters Electronic Key System Page Ports (interface may be required) PABX Page Ports (interface adapter may be Stand Alone Systems Existing 70V Paging Systems Background Music Systems Self-contained amplifier and volume control Operates on -24VDC Screw terminals for all connections Grille simulates recessed lighting fixture No visible mounting hardware due to concealed studs for the speaker and torsion Specifications Amplifier Input Impedance Amplifier Input Level Amplifier Output Ohm nominal nominal watt into 45 Ohm load Requirements to 50 degrees C to 85% non-precipitating V-1011BB – 4″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Dia x 5.0 (19.81cm Dia. x 12.7cm D) lbs. (2.63 kg) V-1011MR – 4″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Ring Dia x 5.0 (19.81cm Dia. x 12.7cm D) lbs. (1.09 kg) V-1012BB – 8″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Dia x 6.0 Dia. x 15.24cm D) lbs. (2.86 kg) Ring Dia x 6.0 Dia. x 15.24cm D) lbs. (1.50 kg) V-1012MR – 8″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Manuals Online! – DESIGN Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers may be to provide one-way paging from any Valcom or talkback page control. The speakers can be used to expand existing 70V paging systems. power and appropriate input signal are applied, voice page can be made. Control Access Figure 1) using the Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers a Valcom page control, the following equipment be required: Appropriate one-way speaker assembly Valcom page control Valcom power supply sized to provide power to the amplified speaker assemblies and control When using the Valcom one-way interior with a Valcom handsfree page control, it recommended that a V-1092 Volume Control be between the zone output and the input. or 70V Paging Systems Figure 2) using the Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers an existing 25 or 70V paging system, the equipment will be required: Appropriate one-way speaker assembly Valcom power supply sized to provide power to the amplified speaker assemblies or 70V line transformer tapped at 1/4 watt an 8 ohm output Valcom V-1094A Page Port Preamp/Expander Applications Tip and Ring input of the amplified speaker may connected directly to the speaker in most key telephones to amplify the level of the A power supply is also required. Cabling Valcom amplified one-way interior speakers 2 pairs to operate. Standard telephone station may be used. Existing telephone wire and cables may also be used. Refer to the tables when planning an installation. Audio Pair: The number of speakers looped on audio pair is not critical unless you have a large job. Table 1 gives guidelines for the of speakers per audio run. 1 – Number of Speakers per Audio Run AWG Run (Ft) AWG Power Pair: The cable runs specified in Table 2 very important and must be followed for operation of the one-way paging speakers. 2 – Number of Speakers per Power Run AWG) Run (Ft) Watt Inside Speakers area covered by Valcom Recessed Ceiling

VSP-V-1011/V-1012 5 AMPLIFIED RECESSED CEILING SPEAKERS AMPLIFIED RECESSED CEILING SPEAKERS instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate and maintain Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers. and installation information for the rings and backboxes used with these is also included in this document. speakers are for use with any Valcom page and are for interior use only. Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers are used provide one-way paging when used with a low audio input. Valcom Paging Adapters Electronic Key System Page Ports (interface may be required) PABX Page Ports (interface adapter may be Stand Alone Systems Existing 70V Paging Systems Background Music Systems Self-contained amplifier and volume control Operates on -24VDC Screw terminals for all connections Grille simulates recessed lighting fixture No visible mounting hardware due to concealed studs for the speaker and torsion Specifications Amplifier Input Impedance Amplifier Input Level Amplifier Output Ohm nominal nominal watt into 45 Ohm load Requirements to 50 degrees C to 85% non-precipitating V-1011BB – 4″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Dia x 5.0 (19.81cm Dia. x 12.7cm D) lbs. (2.63 kg) V-1011MR – 4″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Ring Dia x 5.0 (19.81cm Dia. x 12.7cm D) lbs. (1.09 kg) V-1012BB – 8″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Dia x 6.0 Dia. x 15.24cm D) lbs. (2.86 kg) Ring Dia x 6.0 Dia. x 15.24cm D) lbs. (1.50 kg) V-1012MR – 8″ Recessed Ceiling Speaker Manuals Online! – DESIGN Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers may be to provide one-way paging from any Valcom or talkback page control. The speakers can be used to expand existing 70V paging systems. power and appropriate input signal are applied, voice page can be made. Control Access Figure 1) using the Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers a Valcom page control, the following equipment be required: Appropriate one-way speaker assembly Valcom page control Valcom power supply sized to provide power to the amplified speaker assemblies and control When using the Valcom one-way interior with a Valcom handsfree page control, it recommended that a V-1092 Volume Control be between the zone output and the input. or 70V Paging Systems Figure 2) using the Amplified Recessed Ceiling Speakers an existing 25 or 70V paging system, the equipment will be required: Appropriate one-way speaker assembly Valcom power supply sized to provide power to the amplified speaker assemblies or 70V line transformer tapped at 1/4 watt an 8 ohm output Valcom V-1094A Page Port Preamp/Expander Applications Tip and Ring input of the amplified speaker may connected directly to the speaker in most key telephones to amplify the level of the A power supply is also required. Cabling Valcom amplified one-way interior speakers 2 pairs to operate. Standard telephone station may be used. Existing telephone wire and cables may also be used. Refer to the tables when planning an installation. Audio Pair: The number of speakers looped on audio pair is not critical unless you have a large job. Table 1 gives guidelines for the of speakers per audio run. 1 – Number of Speakers per Audio Run AWG Run (Ft) AWG Power Pair: The cable runs specified in Table 2 very important and must be followed for operation of the one-way paging speakers. 2 – Number of Speakers per Power Run AWG) Run (Ft) Watt Inside Speakers area covered by Valcom Recessed Ceiling

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit. in troubleshooting is available from the factory. When calling, you have a VOM and a lineman test set available and be calling from the job Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities Roanoke, VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly your company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of shipment. The under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or refund of any such device within the warranty period, provided that: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that sealed units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for parts labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, consequential loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Claims for such should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada: Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR PENDANT SPEAKERS NO. V-1015A 3 947016 ONE-WAY AMPLIFIED PENDANT SPEAKERS Pendant Speaker, V-1015A (five watt), is self-amplified and provides paging as well as background music. This speaker has an externally volume control that can be adjusted by a screwdriver through the hole the grille. It is weather-resistant and available in white, black, gray and custom V-1015A-W V-1015A-BK V-1015A-GY x 10 (14.73cm Dia. x 25.4cm H) lbs. (1.45kg) V-1015A requires -24VDC, 300 mA (6 Power Units). V-1015A is FCC Part 68 Registered under To expand a 25/70/100 volt system, add a V- in line before connecting this speaker or to both the amplifier and speaker may V-1015A Pendant Speaker is designed to be from a ceiling using the enclosed chain. The is not attached to the ring at the top of the speaker to damage to the speaker finish during shipping. To the chain, open the link on the end of the chain and the link through the ring located on the top of the and close the link. Make sure the chain is securely to the ceiling. An additional 6 ft. length of chain is available. Part Number V-1093-BK. area covered by a pendant speaker is determined by suspended height of the speaker. Height Coverage

VSP-V-1016,V-1022C-27C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR AMPLIFIED INTERIOR WALL SPEAKERS V-1016-W V-1024C, V-1026C V-1025C, V-1027C One-Way Amplified Interior Speakers, V-1016-BK, V-1022C, V-1023C, V-1025C, V-1026C, V-1026C-W, are self-amplified and capable of paging as well as background music. speakers have externally accessible volume that are screwdriver adjustable. The are vinyl laminated pressboard with either coordinating cloth or woven can grille. All require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) and FCC Part 68 registered under Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Connections Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the and speaker may occur. A V-1095 may used to allow the use of Valcom self-amplified on 70V speaker lines. mounting heights are 8 to 12 ft. above the floor. V-1016-W, V-1022C, V-1023C: the screw holding the mounting bracket to speaker housing. Mount bracket using appro- hardware such as #8 pan head screws. After the required connections, reattach the speaker to the mounting bracket. V-1016 9.7 x 11.5 x 4.0 H x 29.2cm W x 10.16cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1022C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.04kg) V-1023C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1025C: After making required connec- use appropriate hardware such as an 8d nail to hang the speaker housing in the x 9.5 x 6.3 H x 24.1cm W x 16cm D) lbs. (1.63kg) Manuals Online! – V-1026C-W, V-1027C: Remove wing holding mounting bracket to speaker housing. bracket and mount using appropriate such as #8 pan head screws. Reattach housing to mounting bracket. Remove the 4 holding the reverse side grille to the speaker and remove the grille. After making required reattach the grille to the speaker x 10.3 x 4.2 H x 26.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.54kg) area covered by a wall speaker is typically 600 feet. of Speakers per Audio Run Run (Ft.) AWG AWG of Speakers per Power Run Watt Interior AWG ft. ft. ft. AWG ft. ft. ft. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken Assistance in troubleshooting is from the factory. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. & Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 audio from volume from squeal CHART Check that volume control is turned up (clockwise). Using a lineman’s test set check for the proper audio level on the Tip and Ring and if necessary also at the source. Check that volume control is turned up. Check voltage at the speaker assembly when in use, -18 to -24 Vdc required. Using a lineman’s test set, check for the proper audio level on Tip and Ring It is possible that some low level audio will be heard with only one side of and Ring connected. Turn down (counter-clockwise) volume of the speaker. Add a V-9962 Digital Feedback Eliminator. the distance between the telephone and speaker. a noise canceling handset on the telephone in severe problem areas. Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit. in troubleshooting is available from the factory. When calling, you have a VOM and a lineman test set available and be calling from the job Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities Roanoke, VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly your company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or refund of any such defective device the warranty period, provided that: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that sealed units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for parts labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, operation, or use of the warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada: Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR PENDANT SPEAKERS NO. V-1019 3 TALKBACK PENDANT SPEAKER, V-1019 Talkback Pendant Speaker, V-1019 is a 45 Ohm talkback speaker to be used with Valcom “handsfree” talkback control units. The distance can be away from the speaker and still have good talkback depends on the noise level. The speaker is weather-resistant and is available in white, and gray. V-1019-W V-1019-BK V-1019-GY cable is for electrical connections only. Under no circumstances the speaker be suspended from this cable. conductor twisted wire is required for the 45 ohm talkback speakers. 22 or 24 gauge station wire is acceptable. Shielded wire is not required recommended. Connections are as follows: Speaker out from page control to speaker tip. Speaker common to speaker ring. x 10 (14.73cm Dia. x 25.4cm H) lbs. (1.14kg) V-1019 Talkback Pendant Speaker is to be suspended from a ceiling using enclosed chain. The chain is not attached to ring at the top of the speaker to prevent to the speaker finish during shipping. install the chain, open the link on the end of chain and loop the link through the ring on the top of the speaker and close the Make sure the chain is securely fastened the ceiling. An additional 6 ft. length of chain is Order Part Number V-1093-BK. chain here. distance you can be away from a speaker still have good talkback depends on the noise level. The pendant speaker will approximately 250 square feet w

VSP 1010C/-20C/-20KNOB/-21C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR CEILING SPEAKERS Ceiling Speakers, V-1010C, V-1020C, V-1020KNOB, and V-1021C are self-amplified and are capable of voice paging as well as background music. The V-1020KNOB has a permanent knob for volume the V-1010C and V-1020C feature a removable volume control knob, and the V-1021C has an accessible volume control that can be adjusted by screwdriver through the center hole on the grille. The is a 4-inch speaker and the others are 8-inch speakers. All speakers require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) are FCC Part 68 registered under BAFUSA-69358-KX-N. V-1010C V-1020C/-20KNOB V-1021C x 2.9 x 3 x 3 Dia. x 7.37cm D) Dia. x 7.6cm D) Dia x 7.6cm D) lbs. (.77kg) lbs. (1.14kg) lbs. (.68kg) Manuals Online! – Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Do not connect this speaker directly a 25/70/100 volt amplifier as damage to the amplifier and speaker may occur. A may be used to allow the use of self-amplified speakers on 70V lines. 1: TYPICAL CONNECTIONS !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28)(cid:7)(cid:15)(cid:20)(cid:7)(cid:11)(cid:6)(cid:16)(cid:2)(cid:5)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:9)(cid:17)(cid:6)(cid:17) !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28) (cid:27) (cid:8)(cid:7)(cid:15)(cid:9)(cid:20)(cid:10)(cid:22)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:22)(cid:10)(cid:15)(cid:2)(cid:9)(cid:20) !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28)# !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28)(cid:7)(cid:30)(cid:11)(cid:15)(cid:17)”(cid:6)

VSP 1010C/-20C/-20KNOB/-21C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR CEILING SPEAKERS Ceiling Speakers, V-1010C, V-1020C, V-1020KNOB, and V-1021C are self-amplified and are capable of voice paging as well as background music. The V-1020KNOB has a permanent knob for volume the V-1010C and V-1020C feature a removable volume control knob, and the V-1021C has an accessible volume control that can be adjusted by screwdriver through the center hole on the grille. The is a 4-inch speaker and the others are 8-inch speakers. All speakers require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) are FCC Part 68 registered under BAFUSA-69358-KX-N. V-1010C V-1020C/-20KNOB V-1021C x 2.9 x 3 x 3 Dia. x 7.37cm D) Dia. x 7.6cm D) Dia x 7.6cm D) lbs. (.77kg) lbs. (1.14kg) lbs. (.68kg) Manuals Online! – Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Do not connect this speaker directly a 25/70/100 volt amplifier as damage to the amplifier and speaker may occur. A may be used to allow the use of self-amplified speakers on 70V lines. 1: TYPICAL CONNECTIONS !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28)(cid:7)(cid:15)(cid:20)(cid:7)(cid:11)(cid:6)(cid:16)(cid:2)(cid:5)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:9)(cid:17)(cid:6)(cid:17) !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28) (cid:27) (cid:8)(cid:7)(cid:15)(cid:9)(cid:20)(cid:10)(cid:22)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:22)(cid:10)(cid:15)(cid:2)(cid:9)(cid:20) !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28)# !(cid:29)(cid:25)(cid:28)(cid:7)(cid:30)(cid:11)(cid:15)(cid:17)”(cid:6)

VSP-V-1016,V-1022C-27C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR AMPLIFIED INTERIOR WALL SPEAKERS V-1016-W V-1024C, V-1026C V-1025C, V-1027C One-Way Amplified Interior Speakers, V-1016-BK, V-1022C, V-1023C, V-1025C, V-1026C, V-1026C-W, are self-amplified and capable of paging as well as background music. speakers have externally accessible volume that are screwdriver adjustable. The are vinyl laminated pressboard with either coordinating cloth or woven can grille. All require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) and FCC Part 68 registered under Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Connections Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the and speaker may occur. A V-1095 may used to allow the use of Valcom self-amplified on 70V speaker lines. mounting heights are 8 to 12 ft. above the floor. V-1016-W, V-1022C, V-1023C: the screw holding the mounting bracket to speaker housing. Mount bracket using appro- hardware such as #8 pan head screws. After the required connections, reattach the speaker to the mounting bracket. V-1016 9.7 x 11.5 x 4.0 H x 29.2cm W x 10.16cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1022C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.04kg) V-1023C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1025C: After making required connec- use appropriate hardware such as an 8d nail to hang the speaker housing in the x 9.5 x 6.3 H x 24.1cm W x 16cm D) lbs. (1.63kg) Manuals Online! – V-1026C-W, V-1027C: Remove wing holding mounting bracket to speaker housing. bracket and mount using appropriate such as #8 pan head screws. Reattach housing to mounting bracket. Remove the 4 holding the reverse side grille to the speaker and remove the grille. After making required reattach the grille to the speaker x 10.3 x 4.2 H x 26.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.54kg) area covered by a wall speaker is typically 600 feet. of Speakers per Audio Run Run (Ft.) AWG AWG of Speakers per Power Run Watt Interior AWG ft. ft. ft. AWG ft. ft. ft. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken Assistance in troubleshooting is from the factory. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. & Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 audio from volume from squeal CHART Check that volume control is turned up (clockwise). Using a lineman’s test set check for the proper audio level on the Tip and Ring and if necessary also at the source. Check that volume control is turned up. Check voltage at the speaker assembly when in use, -18 to -24 Vdc required. Using a lineman’s test set, check for the proper audio level on Tip and Ring It is possible that some low level audio will be heard with only one side of and Ring connected. Turn down (counter-clockwise) volume of the speaker. Add a V-9962 Digital Feedback Eliminator. the distance between the telephone and speaker. a noise canceling handset on the telephone in severe problem areas. Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials

VSP-V-1016,V-1022C-27C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR AMPLIFIED INTERIOR WALL SPEAKERS V-1016-W V-1024C, V-1026C V-1025C, V-1027C One-Way Amplified Interior Speakers, V-1016-BK, V-1022C, V-1023C, V-1025C, V-1026C, V-1026C-W, are self-amplified and capable of paging as well as background music. speakers have externally accessible volume that are screwdriver adjustable. The are vinyl laminated pressboard with either coordinating cloth or woven can grille. All require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) and FCC Part 68 registered under Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Connections Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the and speaker may occur. A V-1095 may used to allow the use of Valcom self-amplified on 70V speaker lines. mounting heights are 8 to 12 ft. above the floor. V-1016-W, V-1022C, V-1023C: the screw holding the mounting bracket to speaker housing. Mount bracket using appro- hardware such as #8 pan head screws. After the required connections, reattach the speaker to the mounting bracket. V-1016 9.7 x 11.5 x 4.0 H x 29.2cm W x 10.16cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1022C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.04kg) V-1023C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1025C: After making required connec- use appropriate hardware such as an 8d nail to hang the speaker housing in the x 9.5 x 6.3 H x 24.1cm W x 16cm D) lbs. (1.63kg) Manuals Online! – V-1026C-W, V-1027C: Remove wing holding mounting bracket to speaker housing. bracket and mount using appropriate such as #8 pan head screws. Reattach housing to mounting bracket. Remove the 4 holding the reverse side grille to the speaker and remove the grille. After making required reattach the grille to the speaker x 10.3 x 4.2 H x 26.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.54kg) area covered by a wall speaker is typically 600 feet. of Speakers per Audio Run Run (Ft.) AWG AWG of Speakers per Power Run Watt Interior AWG ft. ft. ft. AWG ft. ft. ft. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken Assistance in troubleshooting is from the factory. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. & Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 audio from volume from squeal CHART Check that volume control is turned up (clockwise). Using a lineman’s test set check for the proper audio level on the Tip and Ring and if necessary also at the source. Check that volume control is turned up. Check voltage at the speaker assembly when in use, -18 to -24 Vdc required. Using a lineman’s test set, check for the proper audio level on Tip and Ring It is possible that some low level audio will be heard with only one side of and Ring connected. Turn down (counter-clockwise) volume of the speaker. Add a V-9962 Digital Feedback Eliminator. the distance between the telephone and speaker. a noise canceling handset on the telephone in severe problem areas. Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials

VSP-V-1016,V-1022C-27C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR AMPLIFIED INTERIOR WALL SPEAKERS V-1016-W V-1024C, V-1026C V-1025C, V-1027C One-Way Amplified Interior Speakers, V-1016-BK, V-1022C, V-1023C, V-1025C, V-1026C, V-1026C-W, are self-amplified and capable of paging as well as background music. speakers have externally accessible volume that are screwdriver adjustable. The are vinyl laminated pressboard with either coordinating cloth or woven can grille. All require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) and FCC Part 68 registered under Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Connections Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the and speaker may occur. A V-1095 may used to allow the use of Valcom self-amplified on 70V speaker lines. mounting heights are 8 to 12 ft. above the floor. V-1016-W, V-1022C, V-1023C: the screw holding the mounting bracket to speaker housing. Mount bracket using appro- hardware such as #8 pan head screws. After the required connections, reattach the speaker to the mounting bracket. V-1016 9.7 x 11.5 x 4.0 H x 29.2cm W x 10.16cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1022C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.04kg) V-1023C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1025C: After making required connec- use appropriate hardware such as an 8d nail to hang the speaker housing in the x 9.5 x 6.3 H x 24.1cm W x 16cm D) lbs. (1.63kg) Manuals Online! – V-1026C-W, V-1027C: Remove wing holding mounting bracket to speaker housing. bracket and mount using appropriate such as #8 pan head screws. Reattach housing to mounting bracket. Remove the 4 holding the reverse side grille to the speaker and remove the grille. After making required reattach the grille to the speaker x 10.3 x 4.2 H x 26.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.54kg) area covered by a wall speaker is typically 600 feet. of Speakers per Audio Run Run (Ft.) AWG AWG of Speakers per Power Run Watt Interior AWG ft. ft. ft. AWG ft. ft. ft. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken Assistance in troubleshooting is from the factory. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. & Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 audio from volume from squeal CHART Check that volume control is turned up (clockwise). Using a lineman’s test set check for the proper audio level on the Tip and Ring and if necessary also at the source. Check that volume control is turned up. Check voltage at the speaker assembly when in use, -18 to -24 Vdc required. Using a lineman’s test set, check for the proper audio level on Tip and Ring It is possible that some low level audio will be heard with only one side of and Ring connected. Turn down (counter-clockwise) volume of the speaker. Add a V-9962 Digital Feedback Eliminator. the distance between the telephone and speaker. a noise canceling handset on the telephone in severe problem areas. Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials

VSP-V-1016,V-1022C-27C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR AMPLIFIED INTERIOR WALL SPEAKERS V-1016-W V-1024C, V-1026C V-1025C, V-1027C One-Way Amplified Interior Speakers, V-1016-BK, V-1022C, V-1023C, V-1025C, V-1026C, V-1026C-W, are self-amplified and capable of paging as well as background music. speakers have externally accessible volume that are screwdriver adjustable. The are vinyl laminated pressboard with either coordinating cloth or woven can grille. All require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) and FCC Part 68 registered under Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Connections Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the and speaker may occur. A V-1095 may used to allow the use of Valcom self-amplified on 70V speaker lines. mounting heights are 8 to 12 ft. above the floor. V-1016-W, V-1022C, V-1023C: the screw holding the mounting bracket to speaker housing. Mount bracket using appro- hardware such as #8 pan head screws. After the required connections, reattach the speaker to the mounting bracket. V-1016 9.7 x 11.5 x 4.0 H x 29.2cm W x 10.16cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1022C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.04kg) V-1023C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1025C: After making required connec- use appropriate hardware such as an 8d nail to hang the speaker housing in the x 9.5 x 6.3 H x 24.1cm W x 16cm D) lbs. (1.63kg) Manuals Online! – V-1026C-W, V-1027C: Remove wing holding mounting bracket to speaker housing. bracket and mount using appropriate such as #8 pan head screws. Reattach housing to mounting bracket. Remove the 4 holding the reverse side grille to the speaker and remove the grille. After making required reattach the grille to the speaker x 10.3 x 4.2 H x 26.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.54kg) area covered by a wall speaker is typically 600 feet. of Speakers per Audio Run Run (Ft.) AWG AWG of Speakers per Power Run Watt Interior AWG ft. ft. ft. AWG ft. ft. ft. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken Assistance in troubleshooting is from the factory. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. & Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 audio from volume from squeal CHART Check that volume control is turned up (clockwise). Using a lineman’s test set check for the proper audio level on the Tip and Ring and if necessary also at the source. Check that volume control is turned up. Check voltage at the speaker assembly when in use, -18 to -24 Vdc required. Using a lineman’s test set, check for the proper audio level on Tip and Ring It is possible that some low level audio will be heard with only one side of and Ring connected. Turn down (counter-clockwise) volume of the speaker. Add a V-9962 Digital Feedback Eliminator. the distance between the telephone and speaker. a noise canceling handset on the telephone in severe problem areas. Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials

VSP-V-1016,V-1022C-27C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR AMPLIFIED INTERIOR WALL SPEAKERS V-1016-W V-1024C, V-1026C V-1025C, V-1027C One-Way Amplified Interior Speakers, V-1016-BK, V-1022C, V-1023C, V-1025C, V-1026C, V-1026C-W, are self-amplified and capable of paging as well as background music. speakers have externally accessible volume that are screwdriver adjustable. The are vinyl laminated pressboard with either coordinating cloth or woven can grille. All require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) and FCC Part 68 registered under Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Connections Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the and speaker may occur. A V-1095 may used to allow the use of Valcom self-amplified on 70V speaker lines. mounting heights are 8 to 12 ft. above the floor. V-1016-W, V-1022C, V-1023C: the screw holding the mounting bracket to speaker housing. Mount bracket using appro- hardware such as #8 pan head screws. After the required connections, reattach the speaker to the mounting bracket. V-1016 9.7 x 11.5 x 4.0 H x 29.2cm W x 10.16cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1022C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.04kg) V-1023C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1025C: After making required connec- use appropriate hardware such as an 8d nail to hang the speaker housing in the x 9.5 x 6.3 H x 24.1cm W x 16cm D) lbs. (1.63kg) Manuals Online! – V-1026C-W, V-1027C: Remove wing holding mounting bracket to speaker housing. bracket and mount using appropriate such as #8 pan head screws. Reattach housing to mounting bracket. Remove the 4 holding the reverse side grille to the speaker and remove the grille. After making required reattach the grille to the speaker x 10.3 x 4.2 H x 26.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.54kg) area covered by a wall speaker is typically 600 feet. of Speakers per Audio Run Run (Ft.) AWG AWG of Speakers per Power Run Watt Interior AWG ft. ft. ft. AWG ft. ft. ft. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken Assistance in troubleshooting is from the factory. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. & Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 audio from volume from squeal CHART Check that volume control is turned up (clockwise). Using a lineman’s test set check for the proper audio level on the Tip and Ring and if necessary also at the source. Check that volume control is turned up. Check voltage at the speaker assembly when in use, -18 to -24 Vdc required. Using a lineman’s test set, check for the proper audio level on Tip and Ring It is possible that some low level audio will be heard with only one side of and Ring connected. Turn down (counter-clockwise) volume of the speaker. Add a V-9962 Digital Feedback Eliminator. the distance between the telephone and speaker. a noise canceling handset on the telephone in severe problem areas. Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials

VSP-V-1016,V-1022C-27C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR AMPLIFIED INTERIOR WALL SPEAKERS V-1016-W V-1024C, V-1026C V-1025C, V-1027C One-Way Amplified Interior Speakers, V-1016-BK, V-1022C, V-1023C, V-1025C, V-1026C, V-1026C-W, are self-amplified and capable of paging as well as background music. speakers have externally accessible volume that are screwdriver adjustable. The are vinyl laminated pressboard with either coordinating cloth or woven can grille. All require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) and FCC Part 68 registered under Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Connections Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the and speaker may occur. A V-1095 may used to allow the use of Valcom self-amplified on 70V speaker lines. mounting heights are 8 to 12 ft. above the floor. V-1016-W, V-1022C, V-1023C: the screw holding the mounting bracket to speaker housing. Mount bracket using appro- hardware such as #8 pan head screws. After the required connections, reattach the speaker to the mounting bracket. V-1016 9.7 x 11.5 x 4.0 H x 29.2cm W x 10.16cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1022C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.04kg) V-1023C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1025C: After making required connec- use appropriate hardware such as an 8d nail to hang the speaker housing in the x 9.5 x 6.3 H x 24.1cm W x 16cm D) lbs. (1.63kg) Manuals Online! – V-1026C-W, V-1027C: Remove wing holding mounting bracket to speaker housing. bracket and mount using appropriate such as #8 pan head screws. Reattach housing to mounting bracket. Remove the 4 holding the reverse side grille to the speaker and remove the grille. After making required reattach the grille to the speaker x 10.3 x 4.2 H x 26.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.54kg) area covered by a wall speaker is typically 600 feet. of Speakers per Audio Run Run (Ft.) AWG AWG of Speakers per Power Run Watt Interior AWG ft. ft. ft. AWG ft. ft. ft. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken Assistance in troubleshooting is from the factory. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. & Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 audio from volume from squeal CHART Check that volume control is turned up (clockwise). Using a lineman’s test set check for the proper audio level on the Tip and Ring and if necessary also at the source. Check that volume control is turned up. Check voltage at the speaker assembly when in use, -18 to -24 Vdc required. Using a lineman’s test set, check for the proper audio level on Tip and Ring It is possible that some low level audio will be heard with only one side of and Ring connected. Turn down (counter-clockwise) volume of the speaker. Add a V-9962 Digital Feedback Eliminator. the distance between the telephone and speaker. a noise canceling handset on the telephone in severe problem areas. Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials

VSP-V-1016,V-1022C-27C 4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR AMPLIFIED INTERIOR WALL SPEAKERS V-1016-W V-1024C, V-1026C V-1025C, V-1027C One-Way Amplified Interior Speakers, V-1016-BK, V-1022C, V-1023C, V-1025C, V-1026C, V-1026C-W, are self-amplified and capable of paging as well as background music. speakers have externally accessible volume that are screwdriver adjustable. The are vinyl laminated pressboard with either coordinating cloth or woven can grille. All require -24 Vdc, 50 mA (1 power unit) and FCC Part 68 registered under Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Connections Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the and speaker may occur. A V-1095 may used to allow the use of Valcom self-amplified on 70V speaker lines. mounting heights are 8 to 12 ft. above the floor. V-1016-W, V-1022C, V-1023C: the screw holding the mounting bracket to speaker housing. Mount bracket using appro- hardware such as #8 pan head screws. After the required connections, reattach the speaker to the mounting bracket. V-1016 9.7 x 11.5 x 4.0 H x 29.2cm W x 10.16cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1022C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.04kg) V-1023C 9.6 x 11.5 x 4.2 H x 29.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (1.86kg) V-1025C: After making required connec- use appropriate hardware such as an 8d nail to hang the speaker housing in the x 9.5 x 6.3 H x 24.1cm W x 16cm D) lbs. (1.63kg) Manuals Online! – V-1026C-W, V-1027C: Remove wing holding mounting bracket to speaker housing. bracket and mount using appropriate such as #8 pan head screws. Reattach housing to mounting bracket. Remove the 4 holding the reverse side grille to the speaker and remove the grille. After making required reattach the grille to the speaker x 10.3 x 4.2 H x 26.2cm W x 10.7cm D) lbs. (2.54kg) area covered by a wall speaker is typically 600 feet. of Speakers per Audio Run Run (Ft.) AWG AWG of Speakers per Power Run Watt Interior AWG ft. ft. ft. AWG ft. ft. ft. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken Assistance in troubleshooting is from the factory. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. & Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 audio from volume from squeal CHART Check that volume control is turned up (clockwise). Using a lineman’s test set check for the proper audio level on the Tip and Ring and if necessary also at the source. Check that volume control is turned up. Check voltage at the speaker assembly when in use, -18 to -24 Vdc required. Using a lineman’s test set, check for the proper audio level on Tip and Ring It is possible that some low level audio will be heard with only one side of and Ring connected. Turn down (counter-clockwise) volume of the speaker. Add a V-9962 Digital Feedback Eliminator. the distance between the telephone and speaker. a noise canceling handset on the telephone in severe problem areas. Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit. in troubleshoting is available from the factory. When calling, you have a VOM and a lineman test set available and be calling from the job Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities Roanoke, VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly your company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship conditions of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair refund of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that sealed units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in with the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product received in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Claims for damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR WALL AMPLIFIED WALL SPEAKERS NO. V-1042 5 ONE-WAY AMPLIFIED SLIMLINE WALL SPEAKER Slimline Wall Speaker, V-1042, is self-amplified and may be used to one-way paging from any Valcom one-way or talkback page control. This has an externally accessible volume control located behind the grille and screwdriver adjustable. The V-1042 will cover an area up to 600 sq. ft. and be spaced 20 feet apart. Good quality paging will be heard up to 30 feet in of the speaker. The V-1042 requires -24VDC, 50mA (1 Valcom power The speaker is available in white, black, bronze and gray with a color cloth grille. Custom colors are available upon request. V-1042-BK V-1042-W V-1042-BR V-1042-GY Bronze (Brown) Patent Number D357,682, UK Reg. 2041547 connections as shown in Figure 1. Insert stripped wire (approximately into appropriate terminal (See Figure 2) and clamp the wire by turning the Each connector accepts 18 to 24 AWG wire. not connect this speaker directly to a 25/70/100 volt amplifier as to both the amplifier and speaker may occur. !

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit. in troubleshoting is available from the factory. When calling, you have a VOM and a lineman test set available and be calling from the job Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities Roanoke, VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly your company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship conditions of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that sealed units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will be to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for parts labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, consequential loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Claims for such should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR SLIMLINE WALL SPEAKERS NO. V-1046 3 TALKBACK SLIMLINE WALL SPEAKER 2 Slimline Wall Speaker, V-1046, is a 45 Ohm talkback speaker designed to used with Valcom talkback control units. The distance you can be from the speaker and still have good talkback depends on the ambient noise In a typical office environment, the speaker will cover approximately 600 feet. Custom colors are available upon request. V-1046-BK V-1046-W V-1046-BR V-1046-GY Bronze (Brown) Patent Number D357,682, UK Reg. 2041547 x 10.3 x 3.4 (17.8cm H x 26.2cm W x 8.63cm D) lbs. (1.23 kg) connections as shown in Figure 1. 1 WALL MOUNTING CHART 3 baffle provides two methods of mounting: baffle can be suspended from a nail or hook by a “hanger” that is to the housing. See Figure 2. unit can be attached to a wall using two mounting bosses. The between the mounting boss hole centers is 8.5″. Remove cover secure baffle to wall with screws. This mounting provides better low response for music and a more secure attachment to the wall. Figure 3. No sound in page mode. Check tip and ring for audio at speaker. Check tip and ring for audio at control sound in page mode. Poor listening in talkback Check volume controls at page control. Check talkback volume control at

VSP-45 ohm 6 OHM TALKBACK INTERIOR SPEAKERS WITH LED V-1062B, V-1064B, V-1066B instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain 45 Ohm Talkback Interior Speaker Assemblies LED. 45 Ohm Talkback Interior Speaker Assemblies LED are for use with the Valcom “handsfree” page control units and provide both and talkback functions with LED in the monitor condition. These speakers for interior use only. Ohm Impedance Inch Speaker LED indicator Easy Hook-up (2 connections using house cable station wire) 8″ Ceiling Speaker w/LED Dia. X 2.5″ D Dia. x 6.35cm D) lbs. (1.09 kg) Wall Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille H x 9.7 W x 5.2 D x 24.6cmW x 13.2cmD) lbs. (2.41 kg) Corner Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille x 9.75 x 6.3 x 24.1cmW x 16cmD) lbs. (1.63 kg) Corridor Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille – x 10.3″W x 4.2″D x 26.2cmW x 10.7cmD) lbs (2.59 kg) Requirements mA @ -24 Vdc max (for powering the LED) to +55oC non-precipitating DESIGN 45 Ohm Talkback Speakers are designed to be with the Valcom “handsfree” talkback control In combination with these units, they will both loudspeaker and talkback functions with indication. Manuals Online! – standard Valcom talkback paging system is made of three basic components: Do not split pairs to speakers. Do not use talkback in noisy areas (80dB or Talkback Speaker Selection recommends that the total number of per talkback zone be limited to two talkback forty one-way self-amplified speakers. The behind this recommendation is simple. a page is made into a talkback zone, the party will hear audio from all of the talkback in that zone. If a zone contains more than talkback speakers, the talkback audio from the speakers will impede the quality of the audio from the desired speaker. there are limits to the number of speakers that a page control will actually if a page were made into a talkback zone, all the speakers would simply act like “one-way” except for the one that is closest to the person. Talkback capability can be provided utilizing a V-9922A Talkback Speaker Selection for each talkback speaker. (A V-9928 Wall 5 Watt Amplifier is also required for every six talkback speakers). a page is made, all speakers provide one-way 1,0+(2-(cid:8)$/(cid:12).1(.3/ $ (cid:9)(cid:9)!(cid:13) (cid:7)(cid:10)%(cid:14)(2(cid:5)(cid:13)(cid:30)(cid:2)(cid:6)(cid:3)(cid:7) In order to respond, the paged party the closest speaker with a press of the of that speakers associated talkback selection unit. This activates the chosen as a talkback speaker and resets any selected speaker. Contact Valcom Support at (540) 427-3900 for additional A talkback page control unit. Speakers (45 Ohm) A power supply. the “B” series 45 Ohm Talkback Interior with LED can be used with all Valcom Control Units, consult Valcom VSP Talkback Paging (947100) for detailed on selecting the control unit and power Only the Valcom V-1109RTHF and V-

VSP-45 ohm 6 OHM TALKBACK INTERIOR SPEAKERS WITH LED V-1062B, V-1064B, V-1066B instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain 45 Ohm Talkback Interior Speaker Assemblies LED. 45 Ohm Talkback Interior Speaker Assemblies LED are for use with the Valcom “handsfree” page control units and provide both and talkback functions with LED in the monitor condition. These speakers for interior use only. Ohm Impedance Inch Speaker LED indicator Easy Hook-up (2 connections using house cable station wire) 8″ Ceiling Speaker w/LED Dia. X 2.5″ D Dia. x 6.35cm D) lbs. (1.09 kg) Wall Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille H x 9.7 W x 5.2 D x 24.6cmW x 13.2cmD) lbs. (2.41 kg) Corner Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille x 9.75 x 6.3 x 24.1cmW x 16cmD) lbs. (1.63 kg) Corridor Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille – x 10.3″W x 4.2″D x 26.2cmW x 10.7cmD) lbs (2.59 kg) Requirements mA @ -24 Vdc max (for powering the LED) to +55oC non-precipitating DESIGN 45 Ohm Talkback Speakers are designed to be with the Valcom “handsfree” talkback control In combination with these units, they will both loudspeaker and talkback functions with indication. Manuals Online! – standard Valcom talkback paging system is made of three basic components: Do not split pairs to speakers. Do not use talkback in noisy areas (80dB or Talkback Speaker Selection recommends that the total number of per talkback zone be limited to two talkback forty one-way self-amplified speakers. The behind this recommendation is simple. a page is made into a talkback zone, the party will hear audio from all of the talkback in that zone. If a zone contains more than talkback speakers, the talkback audio from the speakers will impede the quality of the audio from the desired speaker. there are limits to the number of speakers that a page control will actually if a page were made into a talkback zone, all the speakers would simply act like “one-way” except for the one that is closest to the person. Talkback capability can be provided utilizing a V-9922A Talkback Speaker Selection for each talkback speaker. (A V-9928 Wall 5 Watt Amplifier is also required for every six talkback speakers). a page is made, all speakers provide one-way 1,0+(2-(cid:8)$/(cid:12).1(.3/ $ (cid:9)(cid:9)!(cid:13) (cid:7)(cid:10)%(cid:14)(2(cid:5)(cid:13)(cid:30)(cid:2)(cid:6)(cid:3)(cid:7) In order to respond, the paged party the closest speaker with a press of the of that speakers associated talkback selection unit. This activates the chosen as a talkback speaker and resets any selected speaker. Contact Valcom Support at (540) 427-3900 for additional A talkback page control unit. Speakers (45 Ohm) A power supply. the “B” series 45 Ohm Talkback Interior with LED can be used with all Valcom Control Units, consult Valcom VSP Talkback Paging (947100) for detailed on selecting the control unit and power Only the Valcom V-1109RTHF and V-

VSP-45 ohm 6 OHM TALKBACK INTERIOR SPEAKERS WITH LED V-1062B, V-1064B, V-1066B instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain 45 Ohm Talkback Interior Speaker Assemblies LED. 45 Ohm Talkback Interior Speaker Assemblies LED are for use with the Valcom “handsfree” page control units and provide both and talkback functions with LED in the monitor condition. These speakers for interior use only. Ohm Impedance Inch Speaker LED indicator Easy Hook-up (2 connections using house cable station wire) 8″ Ceiling Speaker w/LED Dia. X 2.5″ D Dia. x 6.35cm D) lbs. (1.09 kg) Wall Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille H x 9.7 W x 5.2 D x 24.6cmW x 13.2cmD) lbs. (2.41 kg) Corner Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille x 9.75 x 6.3 x 24.1cmW x 16cmD) lbs. (1.63 kg) Corridor Speaker – wood grain with brown open weave grille – x 10.3″W x 4.2″D x 26.2cmW x 10.7cmD) lbs (2.59 kg) Requirements mA @ -24 Vdc max (for powering the LED) to +55oC non-precipitating DESIGN 45 Ohm Talkback Speakers are designed to be with the Valcom “handsfree” talkback control In combination with these units, they will both loudspeaker and talkback functions with indication. Manuals Online! – standard Valcom talkback paging system is made of three basic components: Do not split pairs to speakers. Do not use talkback in noisy areas (80dB or Talkback Speaker Selection recommends that the total number of per talkback zone be limited to two talkback forty one-way self-amplified speakers. The behind this recommendation is simple. a page is made into a talkback zone, the party will hear audio from all of the talkback in that zone. If a zone contains more than talkback speakers, the talkback audio from the speakers will impede the quality of the audio from the desired speaker. there are limits to the number of speakers that a page control will actually if a page were made into a talkback zone, all the speakers would simply act like “one-way” except for the one that is closest to the person. Talkback capability can be provided utilizing a V-9922A Talkback Speaker Selection for each talkback speaker. (A V-9928 Wall 5 Watt Amplifier is also required for every six talkback speakers). a page is made, all speakers provide one-way 1,0+(2-(cid:8)$/(cid:12).1(.3/ $ (cid:9)(cid:9)!(cid:13) (cid:7)(cid:10)%(cid:14)(2(cid:5)(cid:13)(cid:30)(cid:2)(cid:6)(cid:3)(cid:7) In order to respond, the paged party the closest speaker with a press of the of that speakers associated talkback selection unit. This activates the chosen as a talkback speaker and resets any selected speaker. Contact Valcom Support at (540) 427-3900 for additional A talkback page control unit. Speakers (45 Ohm) A power supply. the “B” series 45 Ohm Talkback Interior with LED can be used with all Valcom Control Units, consult Valcom VSP Talkback Paging (947100) for detailed on selecting the control unit and power Only the Valcom V-1109RTHF and V-

EXPLOSION PROOF TALKBACK HORN 1 V-1069A is an Explosion Proof Handsfree Horn designed to be used with Valcom Talkback Control Units features – proof construction, metal and plastic construction, a wide dispersion and an omni-directional mounting bracket and be used for either interior or exterior paging horn meets or exceeds UL standards for use in areas classified as: I, Division I, Groups C & D: Gas Atmospheres V-1069A has received an FCC type KX designed to be used with FCC registered Telephone Systems. In accordance with FCC with applicable tariffs, this Paging Unit may be installed with the authorization of the host Installations may be made by Valcom, Inc., authorized agent of the same, equipment telephone companies, registered refurbishers, and those qualified for of FCC registered systems under FCC Section 68.215. The FCC Registration BAF9I7-69358-KX-N, will be listed in the filed with the telephone company; it will be recorded in the system log kept by installation maintenance personnel. The local telephone is to be notified of the FCC Registration when this Paging Unit is installed. SPECIFICATIONS H x 14.6″ W x 17.0″ D H x 37.08cm W x 43.18cm D) x 60 lbs. (8.63Kg) access To prevent ignition of hazardous disconnect product from supply circuit opening. Keep assembly tightly closed when operation. Unit must be installed in accordance National Electrical Code requirements for atmospheres. special care in removing back cover of driver enclosure to avoid damaging surfaces. Prior to re-assembly, make that joining surfaces of enclosure are free of Install and tighten all bolts completely. To the specified protection in hazardous please note that no compound of any type to be applied on machined flange. must be exercised in not placing the speaker near noise making equipment such as fans, air conditioner units, etc., as this will the transmission back to the caller. the horn to a suitable surface 10 to 15 feet the floor taking into account installation and accessibility. By loosening the two nuts fasten the mounting bracket to the horn, the may be moved up and down to obtain the position. “D” station wire (or other suitable pairs) to proper speaker leads for connection to the audio (tip and ring). Limit cable runs from Valcom Control Unit to talkback horns to not more 800 feet. Manuals Online! – Control Tip Ring to 2 zone) Supply required) TO A V-1069A ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections. Assistance in troubleshooting is available from the Call (540) 427-3900, and ask for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated or visit our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should repairs necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Sound in Page Mode CHART CAUSES AND CORRECTIONS Check tip and ring for audio at speaker. Check tip and ring at control unit. Sound in Page Mode Check volume controls at page control. Listening in Talkback Check talkback volume controls at page control. Set control at minimum suitable listening level. LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service for period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or refund any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment, product has not been altered in an

VSP-V-1073 9 PLATE SPEAKER ASSEMBLY instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and the V-1073 Vandal Proof Door Plate Assembly. Used to provide handsfree talkback from an door or entryway location. Equipped with a pushbutton switch for to customer provided signaling Any talkback control unit with a 45 Ohm output All Valcom handsfree talkback control units Specifications Faceplate constructed from 11AWG steel Heavy duty steel pushbutton Silver-plated pushbutton switch contacts Mounts in a 2-gang 4″ x 4″ electrical box Four (4) one-way stainless steel screws included louvered speaker guard ohm input impedance x 4.5 x 1.75 H x 11.43cm W x 4.45cm D) lbs. (.68 kg) For proper operation, distribution cable should unshielded twisted pair. Limit cable runs to talkback speakers to less than feet. Connect tip and ring from page control unit output to speaker connections on the When installing the V-1073 Vandal Speaker, double check connections and test before mounting. Once mounted, the cannot be easily removed. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, make certain there are no connections leading to the unit. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, have a VOM available and be from the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. Manuals Online! – equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should repairs necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating your company name, address, phone number, contact person, and nature of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 -1 0 7 3 A L C O M P A G E O NT R O L UNIT P K O UT TO THE V-1073 CHART CAUSES AND CORRECTIONS Sound in Page Mode. Check tip and ring for audio at speaker. Check tip and ring at control unit. Sound in Page Mode. Check volume controls at page control. Listening in Talkback Check talkback volume controls at page control. Set control at minimum suitable listening level. Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment, product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service charge parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the carrier be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada: Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

VSP-V-1080 2 FLEXHORN WATT ONE-WAY PAGING HORN Valcom V-1080 Flexhorn is a one-way paging horn designed to provide voice as well as background music. This horn is proof and can be used indoors or outside in ranging from -20 to +55 degrees C. A control is accessible on the front of the cone. horn is offered in gray, beige, and white. V-1080-GY V-1080-BG V-1080-W White x 8.3 x 3.3 D H x 21.1cm W x 8.4cm D) lbs. (.95 kg) V-1080 requires Vdc, 150 ma (3 Valcom Units) and is FCC Part 68 Registered under Page Control Vdc) -24 Vdc Power Supply Do not connect this speaker directly to 25/70/100 volt amplifier as damage to both amplifier and speaker may occur. A V-1095 be used to provide an interface between a amplified speaker line and Valcom horns. WIRE RUN Horns per Run watts) Run Length (ft.) AWG AWG INSTRUCTIONS MOUNT the template packaged with the speaker, draw the outline on the wall to be cut. Make appropriate connections and test the speaker for operation. appropriate mounting screws (not furnished) and mount the flange as shown. BRACKET or separate the universal bracket leaves by or removing the handle and hardware. Using back leaf as a template, mark the wall through the holes, drill and mount to the wall using screws (not furnished) or mount directly to junction box. Manuals Online! – the T-bracket to the back of the horn as shown the (2) 1/2″ screws provided. CLAMP FOR “I” BEAM MOUNTING “C” clamp is provided with the horns to allow to a beam. Place the bolt through the hole in bottom of the base to secure the “C” clamp to the It is suggested that the horn be mounted to the of the “I” beam to provide maximum adjustments. Mount clamp with (2) screws provided. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify the unit is properly and there are no broken connections leading this unit. Ascertain volume control is turned up. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and a set and be calling from the job site. Call (540) and ask for Technical Support, or (540) for Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly company name, address, phone number, contact and the nature of the problem. Send the unit to: and Return Dept. Inc. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Sound. Volume. Squeal. CHART CAUSE AND CORRECTION Check volume control turned up (clockwise) Check presence and polarity of Vdc and GND. Using a telephone test set, check for the proper audio level on the Tip and Ring and if necessary also at the source. Check volume control is turned up (clockwise). Check voltage at the horn when in use, -20 to Vdc required. Using a telephone test set, check for proper audio level on Tip and Ring leads. is possible that some low level audio will be heard with only one side of Tip Ring connected. Lower volume of horn. Aim horn in different direction. Increase the distance between the telephone and horn. Install a confidencer on the telephone in severe problem areas. Add a V-9962 digital feedback eliminator. Manuals Online! – BRACKET MOUNTED WITH A MOUNTING BRACKET BRACKET WITH CLAMP CLAMP FOR “I” BEAM MOUNTING CLAMP TO HORN FLEXHORN TO BEAM MOUNT USING MOUNTING SCREWS: THE TEMPLATE, MARK LOCATION OF AND MOUNTING HOLES ON WALL. HOLES APPROPRIATE TO MOUNTING AND CUT OUT THE OPENING. FLEXHORN FIRMLY AGAINST A FLAT DRILL THROUGH EACH MOUNTING BOSS SHOWN. MOUNTING IN A STUD WALL WITH MOUNTING SCREWS CONSTRUCTION CEMENT. MOUNTING WITH

VSP-V-1090 3 FLEXHORN OHM TALKBACK HORN Valcom V-1090 Flexhorn is a 45 Ohm talkback designed to be used with Valcom control units. This horn is weather proof and be used indoors or outside in environments ranging -20 to +55 degrees C. V-1090-GY V-1090-BG V-1090-W White x 8.3 x 3.3 H x 21.1cm W x 8.4cmD) lbs. (.91 kg) MOUNT the template packaged with the speaker, draw the outline on the wall to be cut. Make appropriate connections and test the speaker for operation. appropriate mounting screws (not furnished) and mount the flange as shown. BRACKET or separate the universal bracket leaves by or removing the handle and hardware. Using back leaf as a template, mark the wall through the holes, drill and mount to the wall using screws (not furnished) or mount directly to junction box. Mount the T-bracket to the back of the as shown using the (2) screws provided. CLAMP FOR “I” BEAM “C” clamp is provided with the horns to allow to a beam. Place the bolt through the hole in bottom of the base to secure the “C” clamp to the It is suggested that the horn be mounted to the of the “I” beam to provide the maximum of adjustments. Mount clamp with (2) screws provided. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify the unit is properly and there are no broken connections leading this unit. Ascertain volume control is turned up. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and a set and be calling from the job site. Call (540) and ask for Technical Support, or call (540) for Valcom 24-Hour Automated Support or our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly company name, address, phone number, contact and the nature of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – CHART CAUSE AND CORRECTION sound in page mode. Check tip and ring for audio at speaker. Check tip and ring for audio at control unit. sound in page mode. Check volume controls at page control. listening in talkback Check talkback volume control at page control. Set control where audio is clearly audible. Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and for a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, or refund of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will subject to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online!

VSP-V-1092 8 MOUNT VOLUME CONTROL instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain V-1092 Wall Mount Volume Control. V-1092 Wall Mount Volume Control is a volume unit which can be mounted into a single-gang box. The V-1092 comes with its own mount box which provides 1/2″ conduit This unit is compatible with all Valcom and two-way speakers. The V-1092 is not designed to connect to the output of high powered amplifiers. To control volume of one-way amplified assemblies in inaccessible areas. To control large groups of one-way amplified assemblies. To control volume of Valcom talkback Volume control for Valcom V-1039A proof horn. x 2.75 x 2.8 H x 6.99cm W x 7.11cm D) Weight: .8 lbs (.36 kg) instructions cover only the installation for the Valcom V-1092. Consult the instructions of other equipment for relative to each piece of equipment. Connections type station wire or other suitable pairs may be for audio connections. when using a One-Way Control Unit to Figure 1) a. wall mount volume control input tip ring to desired zone output leads from control. wall mount volume control output and ring to speakers. b. when using a Talkback Control Unit to Figure 2) a. wall mount volume control tip input to tip output lead of talkback page unit. wall mount volume control tip terminal to tip lead of talkback ring output of talkback page control ring of talkback speaker. b. c. Mounting – Mount the V-1092 on any surface. Two screws are used to fasten the to the surface. Mounting – Remove faceplate assembly and in standard single-gang electrical box. Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify the unit is properly and there are no broken connections to this unit. trouble still exists, using two clip leads, short tip in tip out and ring in to ring out and test page. If the works, replace the V-1092. If the system still not work continue troubleshooting. If a spare is available, substitute the spare unit for the unit. If the trouble has not been located, to Table 1. Identify the symptoms and perform actions indicated. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and be calling from the job site. Call (540) and ask for Technical Support, or call (540) for Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating your company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 1 – TROUBLESHOOTING CHART audio output to Causes input path. handset across V-1092 input No audio present. Solutions cabling and cross- to V-1092. output path. handset across speaker No audio present. cabling and cross- from V-1092 to LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charg

VSP-V-1094A 6 PORT PREAMP/EXPANDER Response (into 8 Ohm load) to 10KHz ” 3dB maximum instructions cover only the installation of the V-1094A. Consult the practices of other if any other equipment is used. and Power Connections instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain V-1094A Page Port Preamp/Expander. Valcom V-1094A Page Port Preamp/ Expander a solid-state audio preamplifier. The unit comes its own surface mount box which provides 2″ access. The amplifier will accept a high input (600 Ohms) and reduce it to a low output. When the control knob is set on 5, input signal level equals the output signal level. V-1094A is capable of driving 150 Valcom speaker/amplifier assemblies. To interface 600 Ohm type page ports to up to Valcom amplified speakers To expand the number of Valcom amplified on a zone by 150 To pre-amp audio signal on long lines to Valcom speakers To provide master volume control convenience all or a portion of a paging zone. (11.28cm H x 6.99cm W x 7.32cm D) x 2.75 x 2.88 lbs. (.41 kg) Requirements Range Current Current to -26 Vdc “B” Battery mA mA Specifications impedance impedance Ohms Ohms to the figure above for connections. “D” type station wire or other suitable pairs be used for audio and power connections. Manuals Online! – page port preamp/expander input to desired zone output leads from a page or page port. page port preamp/expander output to speakers. Valcom V-1094A terminals labeled and Vdc to ground and Vdc battery respectively. Filtered talk battery may be for signal battery. Mounting – Install romex connector and 2″ plugs in required access holes on supplied gang weather-resistant electrical box. Attach lugs to the box with the two screws Mount the box to suitable surface with hardware. Feed audio/power cable access hole in installed surface mount box. After making required cable install faceplate to box with screws Mounting – Feed audio/power cable through hole in an installed single gang electrical old After making connections, install faceplate box using the screws provided. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify the unit is turned on there are no broken connections leading to this Assistance in troubleshooting is available from factory. When calling, you should have a VOM and be calling from the job site. Call (540) and ask for Technical Support, or call 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a ta

Issue 3 PAGING EXPANDER instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain V-1095 70V Paging Expander. Valcom V-1095 70V Paging Expander is used to 8 Ohm, 25V, 70V, or 100V systems into speaker assemblies. The unit comes with its surface mount box which provides 1/2″ conduit The unit will accept input signal from a 8 Ohm, 70V, or 100V paging system and reduce it to a low reduced level output. To expand existing 8 Ohm/25/70/100V paging without replacing the main amplifier. A V- preamp expander may also be required on the number of speakers added. To provide master volume control convenience to all a portion of a paging zone. x 2.75″W x 2.88″D H x 6.99cm W x 7.32cm D) lbs. (.41 kg) Specifications Impedance: 100V 70V 25V Impedance Response K Ohm K Ohm K Ohm Ohms to 20KHz +3dB instructions cover only the installation of the Valcom Consult the practices of other equipment if other is being used. and Power Connections a 25/70/100V Amplifier Amplifier Output V-1095 70V Expander (V-1095 connects to a single 25, 70, or 100V output) One-Way The V-1095 does not require a power supply. power supply is required for speaker/amplifier assemblies. Vdc Regulated Power Supply or “A” Battery 1 Manuals Online! – Mounting – Install romex connector and closure in appropriate access holes on supplied single gang electrical box. Attach mounting lugs to box with the two screws provided. Mount the box to surface with appropriate hardware. Feed audio through access hole in installed surface mount box. After making required cable connections, faceplate to box with screws provided. Mounting – Feed audio cable through access hole an existing single gang electrical workbox. After connections, attach faceplate to box using the provided. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken leading to this unit. Assistance in is available from the factory. When you should have a VOM available and be calling the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24- Automated Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact and the nature of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 an 8 Ohm Amplifier Output Amplifier Output Ohm V-1095 70V Expander One-Way The V-1095 does not require a power supply. power supply is required for speaker/amplifier assemblies. Vdc Regulated Power Supply or “A” Battery 2 an 8 Ohm Stereo Output Amplifier COM 8 Ohm COM 8 Ohm V-1095 70V Expander Vdc Regulated Power Supply or “A” Battery One-Way V-1095 70V Expander Vdc Regulated Power Supply or “A” Battery One-Way The V-1095 does not require a power supply. power supply is required for speaker/amplifier assemblies. 3 to the figures above for connections. Cabling “D” station wire or other suitable pairs may be used for output connection. 25V, 70V, or 100V input leads to amplifier. V-1095 output leads to speaker/ assemblies or V-1094A. Manuals Online! – audio output to added CHART input path output path

VSP-V-1101A 8 ZONE ONE-WAY PAGE ADAPTER V-1101A, is a One Zone One-Way Page Adapter use with most electronic or electromechanical systems. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain One Zone One-Way Page Adapter. paging unit has received an FCC type KX and is designed to be used with FCC key telephone systems. accordance with FCC rules with applicable tariffs, intercom unit may only be installed with the of the owner of the host system. FCC Registration Number will be listed in the affidavits with the telephone company; it will also be in the system log kept by installation and personnel. The local telephone is to be notified of the FCC Registration when this intercom unit is installed. provide telephone system access to a single zone one-way paging. Electronic key system line key access PABX loop trunk port access Page port access Directly drives Valcom one-way amplified line button access intercom access assemblies Background music input The V-1101A is a one zone single talkpath unit Each V-1101A will drive up to 150 Valcom amplified speaker assemblies x 5.9″W x 2.1″D H x 14.99cm W x 5.33cm D) lbs. (1.04 kg) Specifications Ohms -10dBm Ohms Manuals Online! – SPEAKER SUPPLY 1 – TYPICAL PABX INSTALLATION Requirements to -26 Vdc and “B” battery Battery, 50 mA* Battery, 100 mA (“A” Battery = filtered talk battery) to 50 Degrees C to 85% non-precipitating Valcom V-1101A One-Zone One-Way Page is designed to provide access to paging from standard PABX loop trunk port, an electronic key or 1A2 key system C. O. line button, or a 1A2 system intercom number. In some cases, access also possible from a PABX or Electronic Key page port. All Valcom paging systems are made of three basic components: a page control unit, and a power supply. one-way amplified speaker assemblies are in this manual, consult your Valcom catalog the styles available. Once the style and quantity speakers is determined, select the appropriate supply after referring to the Valcom One-Way VSP or the Valcom catalog. addition to the parts listed in each of the following you will need a 66B type punch down block a 25-pair cable with a female amphenol These may be purchased from Valcom as a with the cable and block already connected and on a mounting frame (part # VM-101). Key or PABX Access using the V-1101A with an electronic key or PABX, the following equipment will be V-1101A One Zone One-Way Page Adapter C. O. Line Card (electronic key system) or Loop Trunk Card Valcom one-way amplified speaker assemblies and style determined by specific A Vdc power supply (size and quantity by number and style of speakers) Press the appropriate line key (electronic system) or dial the appropriate trunk access code You will immediately be connected to the speakers. Make your announcement. The will automatically disconnect when you up. Key Button Access accessing the V-1101A from a 1A2 key line button, the following equipment will be V-1101A One Zone One-Way Page Adapter Valcom one-way amplified speaker assemblies and style determined by specific A Vdc power supply if the existing key supply is not adequate (the power are determined by number and style speakers) A C.O. line card is NOT required in this Press the appropriate line button. You immediately be connected to the paging speakers. Make announcement. The V-1101A will disconnect when you hang up. Intercom Access accessing the V-1101A from a

VSP 7 ZONE PAGE CONTROL V-1109RTHF, Nine Zone Page Control, is a dial microprocessor controlled page unit to be used PABX, Electronic Key or 1A2 Telephone These instructions contain the and information necessary to install, and maintain the Nine Zone Page Control. paging unit has received an FCC type KX and is designed to be used with FCC key telephone systems. In accordance with rules with applicable tariffs, this intercom unit only be installed with the authorization of the of the host system. FCC Registration Number will be listed in the filed with the telephone company; it will be recorded in the system log kept by installation maintenance personnel. The local telephone is to be notified of the FCC Registration when this intercom unit is installed. equipment generates and uses radio frequency and if not installed and used properly, that is strict accordance with the manufacturer may cause interference to radio and reception. It has been tested and found to with the limits for a Class B computing in accordance with the specifications in J of Part 15 of the FCC Rules, which are to provide reasonable protection against If this equipment does cause to radio and television reception, which be determined by turning the equipment off and the user is encouraged to try to correct the by one or more of the following Reorient receiving antenna Relocate equipment with respect to the receiver Plug equipment into different branch circuit provide nine (9) zones of voice announce with reply paging to 1A2 Key, E-Key or PABX systems. zones signaling (tone only) Dial tone Splash tone Ringback tone second repeat alert tone option Combined rotary and tone dialing Conference calling on tone dial systems (handset handset) Background music input and amplifier Built-in all call Single digit dialing Off hook speaker inhibit (1A2) The capacity of the V-1109RTHF is 9 zones and call One talkpath The maximum number of speakers on a zone are 45 Ohm talkback speakers, or forty one-way speaker assemblies. Manuals Online! – Plan dialing codes are 1-9 and 0 for all call. Materials Required the time of installation, the installer should provide following materials: Vdc power supply (if existing supply is not type connecting block pair cable with a female amphenol connector one end Twisted pair cross-connect wire H x 5.9 W x 2.1 H x 14.99cm W x 5.33cm D) lbs. (1.23 kg) Characteristics 1 impedance Tip and Ring cable length to talkback speaker Pulses Limits Ohms ft. audio pps break ratio 10% Standard dB ms ms to 50 to 85% Signals Time Requirements Valcom V-1109RTHF requires Vdc talk and Vdc signal battery. The current and voltage range is shown in Table 2 Battery Battery Battery 2 to Vdc to Vdc to 11 Vac mA. mA. mA/Lamp when working with telephone that BATTERY is NEGATIVE and is POSITIVE. System Requirements V-1109RTHF is designed to work with the – Loop start trunk position. KEY SYSTEM – C.O. line button with trunk card. KEY SYSTEM – C.O. line button on key NOTE: A 400 type line card is not used this arrangement. V-1109RTHF has background music inputs and capable of switching the music. Refer to the titled “Music Connections” for music set up connections.

VSP-V-1109RTVA 9 ZONE PAGE CONTROL V-1109RTVA, Nine Zone Page Control, is a dial microprocessor controlled page unit to be used PABX, Electronic Key or 1A2 Telephone instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain Nine Zone Page Control. paging unit has received an FCC type KX and is designed to be used with FCC key telephone systems. Such installations be made by Valcom, Inc., telephone companies, registered telephone installers of FCC registered under FCC Rules Section 68.215. accordance with FCC rules with applicable tariffs, intercom unit may only be installed with the of the owner of the host system. FCC Registration Number BAF9I7-69358- KX-N, be listed in the affidavits filed with the telephone it will also be recorded in the system log kept installation and maintenance personnel. The local company is to be notified of the FCC Number when this intercom unit is equipment generates and uses radio frequency and if not installed and used properly, that is in accordance with the manufacturer instructions, cause interference to radio and television It has been tested and found to comply with limits for a Class B computing device, in with the specifications in Subpart J of Part of the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide protection against interference. If this does cause interference to radio and reception, which can be determined by the equipment off and on, the user is to try to correct the interference by one or of the following measures: Reorient the receiving antenna Relocate the equipment with respect to the Plug the equipment into a different branch circuit necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an radio/television technician for additional The user may find the following booklet by the Federal Communications Commission “How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Problems.” booklet is available from the US Government Office, Washington, DC 20402. Stock No. provide nine (9) zones of voice announce with all to 1A2 Key, E-Key or PABX telephone systems. Manuals Online! – key systems Electronic key system line key position PABX loop start trunk position page zones Built in preamplifier for one-way page operation Dial tone Ringback tone Combined rotary and tone dialing Background music input and amplifier Built-in all call Single digit dialing Off hook speaker inhibit (1A2) Off hook single digit redial (push asterisk key) The capacity of the V-1109RTVA is 9 zones and call One talkpath The maximum number of one-way speaker assemblies is 40 per unless a V-1094A expander is used. Plan dialing codes are 1-9, 0 for all call. Materials Required the time of installation, the installer should provide following materials: filtered power supply (if existing supply not adequate) type connecting block pair cable with a female amphenol connector one end Twisted pair cross-connect wire x 5.9″W x 2.1″D H x 14.99cm W x 5.33cm D) lbs. (1.23 kg) Requirements Valcom V-1109RTVA requires talk and signal battery. The current and voltage range is shown in Table 1 TABLE 1 60 mA Battery Battery mA mA/Lamp Battery to -26VDC to -25VDC 9 to 11VAC when working with telephone equipment BATTERY is NEGATIVE and GROUND is Characteristics operating parameters of the page control are listed Table 2. TABLE 2 Working Limits impedance Tip and Ring cable length to speaker Pulses Signals ohms ft. audio pps break ratio 10% Stand

VSP-V-1118 5 CALL UNIT V-1118 All Call Unit is a compact, unit designed to be used in with the V-119RTVA and V-119RTHF units to provide an all call feature. equipment has received FCC type KX designed to be used with FCC registered Telephone Systems. In accordance with FCC with applicable tariffs, this Paging unit may be with the authorization of the host system. may be made by Valcom, Inc., an agent of the same, equipment telephone companies, registered refurbishers, and those qualified for of FCC registered systems under FCC Section 68.215. FCC Registration Number, will be listed in the filed with the telephone company; it will be recorded in the system log kept by installation maintenance personnel. The local telephone is to be notified of the FCC Registration when this Paging Unit is installed. SPECIFICATIONS to Speakers: at 24Vdc: range: mW during operation to 50 C H x 5.75″ W x 2.13″ D H x 14.61cm W x 5.41cm D) the V-1118 unit within easy access distance of intercom unit being used (cable is 30″ length). fuses or turn off power source before or disconnecting any cables or leads. connector from existing ICM unit and to plug on all call unit marked speaker. one end of the 22 foot connectorized cable plug of all call unit marked ICM and the other end plug on existing ICM unit (See Figure 1). any stations are to be excluded, refer to Figure 2. all connections before restoring power to calling party dials 29, the intercom switching closes contacts for station 29. Ground, at connector pins 29-46 and 50 of the V-1118, current through the intercom which returns pin 22 of the V-1118. The current into pin 22 an RC network. After a delay of one second, all relays activate. The provide an audio path for the calling party. The second delay essentially deletes the alert tone the V-119 on all call. Strapping pins 48 and 47 on the 66 block inhibits the one second delay allows alert tone over the speakers during all call. ASSISTANCE the all call feature does not work, verify plug If connections are correct, verify ICM is operating properly by removing plug from the side of the V-1118 and connecting to the unit. If the ICM unit operates properly, reverse on the V-1118. Manuals Online! – in troubleshooting is available from the factory. When calling, you should have a VOM and a test set and be calling from the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should repairs necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating your company name, address, phone number, contact person, and nature of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage

VSP-V-1134 7 CALL ONE-WAY PAGE UNIT instructions provide the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain V-1134, All Call One-Way Page Unit. provide one-way all call page to 34 zones when with the V-136RTHF 36 zone page control unit. V-136RTHF 36 zone handsfree control unit One-way all call amplification to 34 zones Dial 0 for all call Automatic release of all call unit with two off hook Easy installation – 30″ plug ended cable provided Built-in volume control for all call level Unit replaces stations 0 and 39 on 36 zone units. x 5.75″W x 2.13″D H x 14.61cm W x 5.41cm D) lbs. (1.8 kg) Requirements Vdc B battery 1 amp maximum milliwatts per speaker unit provides one-way all call page to the The functions and operation of the unit remain the same as without the all call with exception that dialing “0” energizes the all unit and permits a one-way page to all stations of intercom. precautions have been taken at the factory to insure the equipment functions properly. To insure operation and to prevent equipment damage, observe the following: Unplug the power supply before connecting any or cables to the control unit connecting Do not locate the control unit more than 5 feet the power supply or closer than 18 inches. Do not use a lamp tester to check signals, use a A lamp tester when first applied is a circuit to electronic circuits. Do not apply power to the control unit until all have been double-checked. Manuals Online! – the V-1134 close to the V-136RTHF control allowing enough room for the amphenol NOTE: The cable supplied with the unit is long. If units are separated by more than 30″, cable may be required. In a mixed system of Bell/Buzzer and signaling, stations 30-29, 0, and 5-9 be voice signaling. Bells or buzzers be connected as excluded speakers Figure 2). In a new installation, complete all steps of the installation procedure as shown in the instruct- ions for the V-136RTHF, combination. Connect the 25 pair intercom cable from the 66 type split block to the amphenol on the V-1134 marked “to 66 block.” In an existing system without all call, remove the intercom cable from the V-136RTHF and plug it into the amphenol on the V-1134 marked “to 66 block.” If all speakers are to receive all call, refer to Figure 1. One end of the 30″ cable supplied with the V-1134 should be plugged into the amphenol marked “to intercom.” The other end should plug into the V-136RTHF intercom unit. If some stations are to be excluded from the all call, refer to Figure 2. Punch down two 25 pair female amphenol ended cables on a 66 type solid block. Plug one cable to the V-1134 “to intercom” amphenol and plug the second cable to the V-136RTHF. Connect excluded speakers to the appropriate ICM number on the solid block and to the common speaker return on the split block. Connect non-excluded speakers as shown in the V-136RTHF installation instruction. Do not connect speakers to stations 0 39. Connections If using the V-1134 with the V-136RTHF, perform the following: Strap the Y/BN to the G/V on the “to 66 block” pair cable. Connections V-1134 requires no external power connections as power is derived from the power supplied to V-136RTHF. Care should be taken to make sure the power supply is capable of supplying the current requirements when the V-1134 is in the calling party goes off hook on the intercom dials “0”, the intercom switching network closes a for station “0”. This contact connects a ground supplied by the Y/BN lead of the (ICM connector) back to the O/V lead of the (ICM connector). The V-1134 operates a of relays with transfer contacts and all stations transferred to the outputs of audio amplifiers. After 1 second the amplifiers are energized the calling party can make a one-way page to all If station “0” is not dialed, the V-136RTHF perform in the manner de

VSP-V-119RT 6 STATION ROTARY-TONE INTERCOM instructions provide identification, installation, connection and maintenance information the V-119RT intercom unit. V-119RT is a single-path dial select controlled intercom unit to be used 1A2 Key Telephone Systems. paging unit has received an FCC type KX and is designed to be used with FCC key telephone systems. Installations may made by Valcom, Inc., telephone equipment telephone companies, registered refurbishers, and those qualified for of FCC registered systems under FCC Section 68.215. accordance with FCC rules with applicable tariffs, intercom unit may only be installed with the of the owner of the host system. FCC Registration Number will be listed in the affidavits with the telephone company; it will also be in the system log kept by installation and personnel. The local telephone is to be notified of the FCC Registration when this intercom unit is installed. equipment generates and uses radio frequency and if not installed and used properly, that is, strict accordance with the manufacturer may cause interference to radio and reception. It has been tested and found to with the limits for a Class B computing in accordance with the specifications in J of Part 15 of the FCC Rules, which are to provide reasonable protection against interference. If this unit does cause interference radio and television reception, which can be by turning the equipment off and on, the is encouraged to try to correct the interference by or more of the following measures: Reorient the receiving antenna. Relocate the equipment with respect to the Plug the equipment into a different branch Move the equipment away from the receiver. To provide 19 stations of intercom signaling to key systems. key systems stations or zones Dial tone Ringback tone Last number dialed re-ring (tone only) Conference calling on tone dial systems Personal signaling (tone only) Combined rotary and tone dialing The capacity of the V-119RT is 19 stations. One talkpath. Manuals Online! – mA 45 mA lamp mA Plan The dialing codes are: 0, 1, 3-9, 20-29. H x 5.9″ W x 2.1″ D H x 14.99cm W x 5.33cm D) lbs. (1.6 kg) Requirements Working Limits Current to Vdc battery to Vdc battery battery 9V to 11 Vac Characteristics Working Limits Imp. T and R Ohm (incl. inst.) Contacts amps Time sec. Pulses PPS Break ratio Signals Standard Time MS MS to 50/ C to 85/ Non-precip. instructions cover only the installation for the Valcom V-119RT. Consult installation instructions for other equipment that be used. precautions have been taken at the factory to that the equipment functions properly. To proper operation and to prevent equipment please observe the following: Unplug the power supply before making any to the control unit. Do not locate the control unit closer than 18 or farther than 5 feet from the power Do not use a lamp tester to check signals, use a A lamp tester when first applied is a circuit to electronic circuits. Do not apply power to the control unit until all have been double-checked. the V-119RT on a 7″ KTU mounting, relay or on the wall. 1. a 25 pair female amphenol ended to the unit and terminate all leads on a type block. A ground, B ground and lamp ground signal ground common at power to Figure 1 for connecting block and connections. to Figure 2 for connections to 1A2

VSP-V-136RT 7 STATION ROTARY-TONE INTERCOM V-136RT is a single-path dial select controlled intercom and page control used with a 1A2 key system to provide 36 zones bell or buzzer signalling. V-136RT control unit has received an FCC type registration; designed to be used with FCC key telephone systems. In accordance with rules with applicable tariffs, this paging unit only be installed with the authorization of the system. Installations may be made by Valcom, an authorized agent of the same, equipment telephone companies, registered refurbishers, and those qualified for of FCC registered systems under FCC Section 68.215. The FCC Registration BAF9I7-69366-KX-N, will be listed in the filed with the telephone company; it will be be recorded in the system log kept by installation maintenance personnel. The local telephone is to be notified when this intercom unit is Dial tone Ringback tone Last number dialed rering Conference call (tone only) Combined rotary or tone dialing Dial/ringback tone mute Mixed bell and buzzer operation Single or double burst signaling Plan The dialing codes are 0, 5 – 39 x 5.9″W x 2.1″D x 14.99cm x 5.33cm) lbs. (1.47 kg) Requirements Battery Battery Limits Current to Vdc 90mA to Vdc 350mA Characteristics Imp. T and R Contacts Time Pulses Limits ohm (incl. inst.) amps second PPS Break ratio +/- 10% Standard Frequencies Time 40MS to 50o to 85% Manuals Online! – precautions have been taken at the factory to that the equipment functions properly when correctly. Please observe the following before applying power to the equipment the equipment may be damaged and the warranty Unplug the power supply before making any to the control unit. Do not locate the control unit closer than 18 or further than 5 feet from the power Do not use a lamp tester to check signals, use a A lamp tester when first applied is a circuit to electronic circuits. Do not apply power to the control unit until all have been double-checked. the V-136RT on a 7″ KTU mounting, relay or on the wall. Fasten a 25 pair cable to the unit and terminate leads on a 66 type block per Figure 1, 2 or 3. Strap 1 ground, B ground, lamp ground, 18 Vac 105 Vac signal grounds common at power Refer to Figure 1 for connections; use the chart Figure 1 to set the option programming. Option switches 3 and 4 must be in the off for proper operation with bells or Refer to Figure 2 for connections for 36 stations buzzer signalling. This figure may also be for 36 stations of bell signalling by the 18 Vac buzz voltage with 105 ring voltage. Refer to Figure 3 for connections for mixed with 20 stations of bells and 16 of buzzers. make an intercom call, go off-hook and dial the of the desired station. Dial tone will be after the first number is dialed. A one second tone will indicate that the called station is signalled. rering the same station, press the “*” button. The will be signalled as long as the * button is To rering rotary, dial “1”. The station will be for one second each time a “1” is dialed. conference calling (tone only), dial the first number, press the “#” button to receive dial then dial the next station number. Method of Operation the calling party goes off-hook, the switch contacts in the telephone set close the tip and to form a loop. Loop closure detection logic operates the lamps at all stations and returns dial to the telephone set. Dial detection circuitry will receive dialing information and operate relays circuitry to supply signalling voltage to the station.

VSP-V-136RTHF 6 ZONE TALKBACK INTERCOM/ CONTROL UNIT V-136RTHF is a single-path dial select controlled intercom and page control used with a 1A2 key system or a PABX trunk to provide 36 zones of handsfree talkback V-136RTHF control unit has received an FCC KX registration; designed to be used with FCC Key Telephone Systems. In accordance FCC rules with applicable tariffs, this Paging may only be installed with the authorization of host system. Installations may be made by Inc., an authorized agent of the same, manufacturers, telephone companies, telephone refurbishers, and those qualified installation of FCC registered systems under FCC Section 68.215. The FCC Registration BAF9I7-69358-KX-N, will be listed in the filed with the telephone company; it will be recorded in the system log kept by installation maintenance personnel. The local telephone is to be notified when this intercom unit is zone Dial tone Ringback tone Single or double signaling Combination rotary/tone Last number dialed rering Dial/rering tone mute Mixed bell and buzzer operation Mixed one-way page and bell or buzzer Mixed two-way (handsfree) page and bell or operation station one-way page (using one-way speakers) All call (requires V-1134 and reduces number of to 34) Can be used with a variety of Valcom 45 ohm speakers and paging horns Plan The dialing codes are 0, 5 – 39. Equipment Required Valcom -24 Vdc power supply (1A2 type power for buzzers) Twisted pair cross-connect wire Volt-ohm-milliammeter AWG power wire or cable, and x 5.9″W x 2.1″D H x 14.99cm W x 5.33cm D) lbs. (1.6 Kg) Requirements Limits Current Battery Battery Battery to Vdc 90 mA to Vdc 500 mA 9 to 11 Vac mA per lamp Manuals Online! – Characteristics Imp. T and R Limits ohm (incl. inst.) Cable Length: Way Page Page Pulses Signals DTMF feet feet PPS Break ratio ” 10% Time 40MS to 50o C to 85% precautions have been taken at the factory to that the equipment functions properly when correctly. Please observe the following before applying power to the equipment the equipment may be damaged and the warranty a. the key system power supply before any wires or cables from the connecting block. With power accidental bridging of two terminals a wiring tool may damage electronic not locate the control unit more than five from the power supply. not use a lamp tester to check signals in control unit. Use a voltmeter. A lamp when first applied, is a short circuit to circuits. not apply power to the control unit until connections have been double-checked. b. c. d. runs to talkback speakers to not more 800 feet. Do not split pairs. all grounds common at power supply. audio runs to one-way speakers to not more 5000 feet. Limit power runs to one-way to maximum recommended for the particular type. off-hook speaker cancel circuit, each ICM “A” must be connected through a 10K 1/4W 5% to the inhibit input (W/GR) (Refer to Figures and 3). When “called” station or any other party off-hook, the presence of two resistance grounds or turns off speaker. “Handsfree” mode can be restored by terminating call and redialing the V-136RTHF on a 7″ KTU mounting, relay or on a wall. (The presence of a large field induced by some power supplies cause a loud 60 cycle hum on talk paths. To or reduce hum, mount control unit at least 12″ power supply). a 25 pair cable to the unit and terminate all on a 66 type block per Figure 1, 2 or 3. Do not attempt to wire one group (10-29 or 0, 5-9

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit. in troubleshooting is available from the factory. When calling, you have a Volt-ohm meter and a lineman test set available and be calling the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or call 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service in Roanoke, VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating your company name, address, phone number, contact person, and nature of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship conditions of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that sealed units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will be to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for parts labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, consequential loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Clams for such should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR SERIESTM, HIGH FIDELITY CEILING SPEAKER NO. V-1420 4 SIGNATURE SERIESTM , HIGH FIDELITY SPEAKER Signature SeriesTM Ceiling Speaker, V-1420, is a high fidelity, self- (6 watt amplifier) speaker and may be used to provide one-way paging high quality music reproduction from any Valcom page control. This has an adjustable volume control located on the front of the unit. The required -24VDC, 200mA (4 Valcom power units). The speaker is in a white powder epoxy finish. No power amplifier required. Do not connect this speaker directly a 25/70/100 volt amplifier as damage to both the amplifier and may occur. (Recommended nominal input level to the is -10dBm). CONNECTIONS an 8.5 diameter hole in ceiling tile. After connections have been made to speaker, attach speaker to ceiling tile using the mounting hardware provided. metal backbox with rails is available separately as model V-9816M). Connections to a Valcom Page Adapter twisted wire ge Page Control V dc nd Way d ake r 1 -24 Vdc r Supply Quantity of Speakers per Specific Power Run Category 3 Twisted Pair Telephone Wire) PER RUN RUN LENGTH (FT.) NOTICE The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is in a commercia

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit. in troubleshooting is available from the factory. When calling, you have a VOM and a lineman test set available and be calling from the job Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities Roanoke, VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly your company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the nature the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship conditions of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will be applied to defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for parts labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, consequential loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Claims for such should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR SERIES HIGH FIDELITY MONITOR SPEAKER NO. V-1440 4 SIGNATURE SERIES FIDELITY MONITOR SPEAKER Valcom Signature Series Monitor Speaker, V-1440, is a high-fidelity, (5 watt) speaker that may be used to provide one-way paging and high music reproduction from any Valcom one-way or talkback page control. speaker has an externally accessible volume control located behind the grille is screwdriver adjustable. The V-1440 will cover an area up to 600 sq. ft. and be spaced 20 feet apart. Good quality paging and music will be heard up to feet in front of the speaker. The V-1440 requires -24 VDC, 300 mA (6 Valcom units). The speaker is available in white, black, brown, and gray with a color cloth grille. Custom colors are available upon request. V-1440-BK V-1440-W V-1440-BR V-1440-GY connections as shown in Figure 1. Insert stripped wire (approximately 3/16″) appropriate terminal (See Figure 2) and clamp the wire by turning the screw. connector accepts 18 to 24 AWG wire. power amplifier is required. Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the amplifier and speaker may occur. (Recommended nominal input level to the V-1440 is -10 dBm). Page pair twisted wire Vdc 1 -24 Vdc Power Supply Quantity of Speakers per Specific Power Run Category 3 Twisted Pair Telephone Wire) per Run Run Length (Ft.)

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit. in troubleshooting is available from the factory. When calling, you have a VOM and a lineman test set available and be calling from the job Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities Roanoke, VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly your company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the nature the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship conditions of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will be applied to defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for parts labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, consequential loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Claims for such should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR SERIES HIGH FIDELITY MONITOR SPEAKER NO. V-1440 4 SIGNATURE SERIES FIDELITY MONITOR SPEAKER Valcom Signature Series Monitor Speaker, V-1440, is a high-fidelity, (5 watt) speaker that may be used to provide one-way paging and high music reproduction from any Valcom one-way or talkback page control. speaker has an externally accessible volume control located behind the grille is screwdriver adjustable. The V-1440 will cover an area up to 600 sq. ft. and be spaced 20 feet apart. Good quality paging and music will be heard up to feet in front of the speaker. The V-1440 requires -24 VDC, 300 mA (6 Valcom units). The speaker is available in white, black, brown, and gray with a color cloth grille. Custom colors are available upon request. V-1440-BK V-1440-W V-1440-BR V-1440-GY connections as shown in Figure 1. Insert stripped wire (approximately 3/16″) appropriate terminal (See Figure 2) and clamp the wire by turning the screw. connector accepts 18 to 24 AWG wire. power amplifier is required. Do not connect this speaker directly to a volt amplifier as damage to both the amplifier and speaker may occur. (Recommended nominal input level to the V-1440 is -10 dBm). Page pair twisted wire Vdc 1 -24 Vdc Power Supply Quantity of Speakers per Specific Power Run Category 3 Twisted Pair Telephone Wire) per Run Run Length (Ft.)

SINGLE ZONE PAGE CONTROL UNIT 1 V-2000A is an Integrated Single Zone Paging Unit for use with any electronic key or The control unit provides external power (12 power units) for powering Valcom One-Way Speakers. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain Integrated Single Zone Paging Control Unit. To reduce the risk of fire or shock, do not expose this appliance rain or moisture.” Shock Hazard – Do Not Open.” Risque de Choc Electrique ne pas Corriente Elecrica – No Abra.” Provides telephone system access to a single of one-way paging Key Systems (400 type line card required) Electronic Key Systems PABXs Stand Alone Systems to Figure 1 for a block diagram of a typical Electronic key system line key access PABX loop start trunk port access Page port access Switchable battery feed for loop start operation RJ11 for Tip and Ring connections Power on LED Drives up to 150 Valcom one-way amplified assemblies (audio) Background music input Voice operated switch to mute music during page Screw terminals provided for all connections UL Listed Supplies 12 Valcom power units for powering one-way amplified speakers May be used with 25 or 70 volt amplifiers AC powered AC input fused at .5 amp The V-2000A is a one-zone single talkpath unit. Each V-2000A will drive up to 150 Valcom amplified speaker assemblies (audio) provides 12 Valcom power units for the speaker amplifier assemblies (The can also be used to access 25 or 75 volt amplifiers.) Manuals Online! – VALCOM ONE-WAY SPEAKERS E-KEY PABX V-2000A ZONE SYSTEM Additional power supplies required for large numbers of speakers. 1 – TYPICAL INSTALLATION x 7.7″W x 5.3″D H x 19.6cm W x 13.5cm D) lbs. (1.2 kg) Power Requirements Voltage: Current: Vac Amp Temperature: Humidity: to 40 C (32 to 104 F) to 85% non-precipitating Ohms nominal to 600 Ohms nominal Ohms nominal Vdc at 600 mA Specifications Impedance: Level: Source Input Impedance: Switch Sensitivity: Input Level: Impedance: Level: Output: DESIGN Valcom V-2000A Integrated Single Zone Page Unit provides access to paging from a PABX loop start trunk port, an Electronic System C. O. line button, or a 1A2 Key System O. line button (a 400 type line card is required). In cases access is also possible from a PABX or Key System page port. Key or PABX Access using the V-2000A with an electronic key or PABX the following equipment will be 1 – V-2000A Integrated Single Zone Page Control 1 – C. O. Line Circuit (Electronic key system) or 1 Start Trunk Circuit (PABX) Valcom One-Way Amplified Speaker Assemblies and style determined by specific Press the appropriate line key (electronic system) or dial the appropriate trunk access code You will immediately be connected to the speakers. Make announcement. The will automatically disconnect when you up. Port Access accessing the V-2000A from a page port the equipment will be required: One V-2000A Integrated Single Zone Page Unit Telephone system page card required for external page outputs) Valcom One-Way Amplified Speaker (quantity and style determined by installation) Follow the telephone manufacturers on how to access external paging. You immediately be connected to the paging speakers. announcement. The V-2000A will disconnect when you hang up. Music music may be connected to the V-2000A using any of the above configurations.

VSP-V-2001A 6 ZONE (PLUS) PAGE CONTROL UNIT V-2001A provides telephone system access to a zone of one-way paging. To reduce the risk of fire or shock, do not expose this equipment rain or moisture.” Shock Hazard – Do Not Open.” Risque de Choc Electrique ne pas Corriente Electrica – No Abra.” To reduce the risk of fire replace with same type 1A, 125V fuse. 1A, 125V be replaced by a 0.5A, 250V provided selector is set for 230V. Afin de r le risque de feu, le fusible par le m type de 1A, 125V. On peut utiliser un fusible 0.5A, 250V pourvu que le s soit fix sur 230V. Ne pas Zur verringerung von die sicherung nur mit derselben 1A, 125V ersetzen. Statt 1A, 125V Kann 250V Benutzt werden, vorausgesetzt, spannung ist auf 230V eingestellt. Nicht Para reducir el peligro de remplazarlo unicamente con un del mismo tipo 1A, 125V. El fusible 1A, 125V podra ser remplazado por uno 0.5A, 250V si el selector de voltaje esta en 230V. No abres. Methods Electronic Key System (C. O. Line Position) PABX (Loop Start Trunk Port) Key Systems (400 type line card required) Ohm Page Port Dedicated single line telephone(s) Page override capability (using C. O. line or loop start trunk port) Switchable battery feed for loop start operation RJ11 for Tip and Ring connections AGC on all voice outputs Provides audio for up to 150 Valcom one-way speaker assemblies Background music input Voice operated VOX to mute music during page Easily accessible music and tone volume controls Removable screw terminal connectors provided Supplies 20 Valcom power units for powering 1-Way Amplified speakers (1 amp Additional power supplies are required for quantity of speakers using over 20 power units. Page with music outputs (2 provided); music during page Page without music output Battery Backup input (use Valcom VPB-260 backup supply) Time Night ring/warble tone (closure or 90 Vac sequence of tones: overrides music ring mixes with music and page clock mixes with music and page Manuals Online! – switches for selection of night ring time clock tones per output May be used with 25 or 70 volt amplifiers AC powered, 115 or 230 Vac AC input fused at 1 amp @ 115 Vac, 60 Hz or .5 recognized power connector @ 230 Vac, 50 Hz Volt selector switch for international use UL Listed x 9″W x 2.4″D H x 22.86cm W x 6.10cm D) Weight: 3.7 lbs. (1.68 kg) Specifications Impedance: Level: Switch Sensitivity: Source Input Impedance: Input Level: Impedance: Level: Output: Ohms nominal to 600 Ohms nominal Ohms nominal amp at -24 Vdc 1.0 Amp 0.5 Amp Power Requirements 115 Vac 230 Vac Backup V-2001A is equipped with a standard 3-prong MOLEX connector to allow connection of a output (3 amp) battery backup supply (Valcom or equivalent) in case of AC power failure. time will be a function of system usage. Use a cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG and grounding type attachment plug rated a of 15A, 250V. The cord set should the appropriate safety approvals for the in which the equipment will be installed should be marked HAR. The socket outlet shall be installed near the and shall be easily accessible. The AC line cord of the VPB-260 and the line cord of the V-2001A should be plugged into same AC circuit. to 40 Degrees C to 85%

VSP-V-2900 3 ZONE DOOR ANSWERING UNIT V-2900 Door Answering Unit provides voice from a designated telephone station to a door. When used in conjunction with a door plate speaker, the pushbutton on the door plate speaker will the phone to ring (1 second on, 4 seconds off). answering the call, the system user can converse the person at the door. (The telephone may also the door speaker). V-2900 can be used with a dedicated single line set, a loop start trunk port of a PABX or C. Line Position of an E-Key System. to Figure 1 for a block diagram of a typical Loop start trunk access from a PABX or C. O. Position of an E-Key system Dedicated single line telephone access Phone to speaker volume control Speaker to phone volume control Screw terminals for all connections Built-in 30 Hz ring generator Cycle ringing (1 second on, 4 seconds off) Tone at speaker when button pressed to access Vdc powered (power supply included) Automatic cut-off after approximately 8 rings or (whichever occurs first) Impedance: Level: Impedance: Supply: Req.: Ohms -10dBm Ohms Vac, 30Hz Vdc at 250 mA nom. Weight: 3.1 lbs. (1.41 kg) x 4.5″W x 2.35″D H x 11.43cm W x 5.97cm D) to 50 Degrees C to 85% non-precipitating or PBX Access using the V-2900 with an Electronic Key or PABX, the following equipment is 1 V-2900 Door Answering Unit 1 C.O. Line Position (E-Key) OR Loop Start Trunk Port (PABX) 1 Door Plate Speaker 1 -24 Vdc power supply (included) Line Phone Access using the V-2900 with a dedicated single line the following equipment is required: A dedicated single line telephone is one that only connected to the V-2900 Door Answering A single line telephone may not be connected to the V-2900 and a central office line.) 1 V-2900 Door Answering Unit 1 Single Line Telephone (Dedicated) 1 Door Plate Speaker 1 Vdc power supply (included) Manuals Online! – the metal mounting plate from the rear of the enclosure. Using two #6 3/4″ wood screws, the plate in a vacant space on the backboard the telephone system common equipment. Both holes must be utilized to insure secure of the unit. See Figure A. the V-2900 enclosure to access connections and switches. Slide the rear of the unit (contains board) onto the mounting plate and lock in place screw provided. Make connections. 1. Tip and Ring of the C.O. Line Port a PABX, key system or single line to screw terminals labeled Tip and on the V-2900. Vdc (“-” terminal) from the supply to screw terminal on V-2900 Vdc. GND (“+” terminal) from the power to upper screw terminal on V-2900 GROUND. talkback speaker Tip and Ring to terminals labeled SPKR on the door pushbutton connections closure) to the second screw labeled GROUND and SPKR SW the V-2900. (See Figure 2). cover and lock in place using the #6 screw included with the unit. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

VSP-V-2901A 3 DOOR ANSWERING SYSTEM V-2901A, Universal Door Answering System, used with Valcom Door Plate Speakers, voice paging with handsfree reply to a door any telephone location. The V-2901A initiates on the telephone system and sends a tone to the door speaker. The individual the phone responding to the signal will determine if should be allowed. Pressing a programmed on the telephone dialpad or pressing the remote will unlock the door to allow admission. The also provides an alarm control output to an alarm system of an unauthorized entry. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain Universal Door Answering System. Notice equipment generates and uses radio frequency and if not installed and used properly, that is, strict accordance with the instructions listed in this Manual, may cause interference to radio and reception. has been tested and found to comply with the limits a Class B Computing Device in accordance with specifications in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC which are designed to provide reasonable against such interference in a residential If this equipment does cause interference radio or television reception, which can be by turning off the equipment, and seeing the interference stops, the user is encouraged to try correct the interference by one or more of the measures: Reorient the receiving antenna Relocate the equipment with respect to the radio Move the equipment further away from the radio television television Plug the equipment into a different branch circuit The manufacturer is not responsible for any or TV interference caused by unauthorized to this equipment. Such modifications void the user authority to operate the Electronic Key Systems PABXs Stand Alone Systems Key Systems to Figure 1 for a simplified block diagram of a installation. Manuals Online! – V-2901A Door System 1 SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A TYPICAL INSTALLATION Compatible with PABX, E-Key, and 1A2 systems Switch selectable – loop or ground start access Provides handsfree talkback RJ11 modular connector for Tip and Ring Power ON LED Provides door unlock contacts Programmable options – access code Pattern lock relay of lock relay activation door can remain open after unlock delay time) delay time of Ringing station alarm disable code alert tone for manual door unlock (push-button) Built-in 30 Hz ring voltage generator with on/off Ringback tone to speaker Calls can be placed On Hold Background music input with volume control Speaker to phone volume control Phone to speaker volume control Confirmation tone Compatible with tone dial phones Works with Valcom V-1072A door plate speaker other Valcom talkback or door plate speaker Compatible with VPB-260 battery backup x 11.0″W x 2.3″D H x 27.94cm W x 5.84cm D) lbs. (1.36 kg) Specifications Impedance: Level: Impedance: Supply: Requirements Supply: Ohms Nominal Ohms Vac, 30 Hz Vdc filtered mA minimum to 40 Degrees C non-precipitating following equipment is recommended when the V-2901A: – V-2901A Universal Door Answering System – C. O. Line Position (Electronic Key – Loop Trunk Position (PABX); or – 400 type line card (1A2 key) – Dedicated single line phone* – Valcom Door Plate Speaker** – VP-624B Power Supply Manuals Online! – * A single line telephone cannot be connected to the V-2901A and an incoming central of

VSP-V-2904 6 FOUR DOOR ANSWERING SYSTEM V-2904, Universal Four Door Answering when used with Valcom Door Plate provides voice paging with handsfree reply up to four doors from any telephone location. The initiates ring-in on the telephone system and a confirmation tone to the door speaker. The at the phone responding to the signal will if access should be allowed. Pressing a code on the telephone dialpad or the remote button will unlock the door to admission. The V-2904 also provides an alarm output to alert an unauthorized entry. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain Universal Four Door Answering System. Notice equipment generates and uses radio frequency and if not installed and used properly, that is, strict accordance with the instructions listed in this Manual, may cause interference to radio and reception. has been tested and found to comply with the limits a Class B Computing Device in accordance with specifications in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC which are designed to provide reasonable against such interference in a residential If this equipment does cause interference radio or television reception, which can be by turning off the equipment, and seeing the interference stops, the user is encouraged to try correct the interference by one or more of the measures: Reorient the receiving antenna Relocate the equipment with respect to the radio Move the equipment further away from the radio television television Plug the equipment into a different branch circuit The manufacturer is not responsible for any or TV interference caused by unauthorized to this equipment. Such modifications void the user authority to operate the Electronic Key Systems PABXs Stand Alone Systems Key Systems to Figure 1 for a simplified block diagram of a installation. Manuals Online! – V-2904 Door System to 4 FIGURE 1 – SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A TYPICAL INSTALLATION Compatible with PABX, E-Key, and 1A2 systems Switch selectable – loop or ground start access Provides handsfree talkback to four separate RJ11 modular connector for Tip and Ring Power ON LED Provides contacts for up to four circuits Programmable options – access code Pattern Identification lock relay of lock relay activation door can remain open after unlock delay time) delay time of ring cycles station alarm disable code alert tone for manual door unlock (push-button) Built-in 30 Hz ring voltage generator with on/off Ringback tone to speaker Calls can be placed On Hold Call waiting One-way all call with volume control Background music input with volume control Speaker to phone volume control Phone to speaker volume control Simultaneous calls placed in queue Dial tone Confirmation tone Compatible with tone dial phones Works with Valcom V-1072A door plate speaker other Valcom one-way or talkback speaker Compatible with VPB-260 battery backup 8.6″H x 11.0″W x 2.3″D H x 27.94cm W x 5.84cm D) 3.1 lbs. (1.41 kg) Specifications Impedance: Level: Impedance: Supply: for REN of 5.0 Requirements Supply: Ohms Nominal Ohms Vac, 30 Hz Vdc filtered mA minimum to 40 Degrees C non-precipitating Manuals Online! – following equipment is recommended when the V-2904: – V-2904 Universal Four Door Answering – C. O. Line Position (Electronic Key or 1 – Loop Trunk

VSP-V-2920 6 20 ZONE TALKBACK INTERCOM SYSTEM V-2920, Advanced 20 Zone Talkback Intercom is a communications system which provides paging with handsfree reply for up to 20 zones. V-2920 is for use with any electronic or 1A2 key or PABX loop start trunk port. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain Advanced 20 Zone Talkback Intercom System. To reduce the risk of fire or electric do not expose this appliance to rain or Shock Hazard – Do Not Open.” Risqu de Choc Electrique ne pas Ouvrir.” Corriente Electrica – No Abres.” V-2920 provides 20 zones of paging with reply. The system also provides the ability a remote speaker location equipped with a call to call the attendant location. V-2920 system consists of three components: A Control, a V-2990 Ring Down Device, and a Power Supply. PABX Loop Start Trunk Port E-Key C.O. line position Dedicated single line phone Key line position equipped with line card to Figure 1 for a block diagram of a typical in” from speaker locations zones of handsfree communication Built-in handsfree amplifier Background music input Built-in all call with “meet me” capability Calls placed in queue Override capability from speaker locations Dial tone (optional) Alert/ringback tone (optional) Repeated alert tone (optional) Auxiliary contact closures for zones 26, 27, 28, Lamp contact closure Ring contact closure Control unit is battery backup compatible input The capacity of the V-2920 is 20 zones plus all The V-2920 is a single talkpath unit. The maximum number of speakers per zone are 45 Ohm speakers and 40 one-way amplified Manuals Online! – Control Unit – 8.55″ H x 11.0″ W x 2.35″ D H x 27.94cm W x 5.97cm D) lbs. (3.04 kg) Ring Down Device 8.2 x 4.55 x 2.3 H x 11.56cm W x 5.84cm D) lbs. (.57 kg) Power Supply 3.0 x 2.5 x 2.0 H x 6.35cm W x 5.08cm D) lbs. (.36 kg) Specifications – Control Unit Impedance: Level: Output Impedance: Aux/Music Input: Ohms -10 dBm Ohms Ohm low level – Ring Down Device Impedance: Output Voltage: Ohms Vac ring generator – Power Supply Output: Vdc +/- 3 V “B” Battery Signal Battery) Plan The dialing codes are 10 to 29 and 0 for all call. Contacts V-2920 is equipped with 6 sets of auxiliary closures. They are: Contact Contact on loop closure. ringing cycle 2 “ON”, 4 seconds 26 Contact Operates when station 26 is dialed 27 Contact Operates when station 27 is dialed the “*” key is pressed. the “*” key is pressed. 28 Contact Operates when station 28 is dialed 29 Contact Operates when station 29 is dialed the “*” key is pressed. the “*” key is pressed. Controls V-2920 is equipped with 5 volume controls. Phone to Speaker – Adjusts the transmit volume. Speaker to Phone – Adjusts the receive volume. Music 1 adjusts background music for zones Music 2 adjusts background music for zones All Call adjusts the one-way all call level. Requirements – Control Unit Vac Watts – Ring Down Device to -26.0 Vdc, 200 mA – Power Supply Vac, 60 Hz, 18 watts Temperature: Humidity: to 40 Degrees C to 85% non-precipitating Manuals Online! –

VSP-V-2924 3 INTERCOM SYSTEM 24/48/72/96 ZONE Information Control/Connector Locations Block Connections Port Connection Music Connection Speaker/Call Switch Conn. Option Tone Source (ex.V-9927A) Printer Port Cable Page Port All Call Page Priority Page Page Option Sync Options Station Access (Call Button) Station Dialing Plan CHART WARRANTY ASSISTANCE OF TERMS 1, 2 2, 3 3, 4 3, 4 5 7 8 V-2924 with V-2925 Expansion Unit V-2924 Talkback Intercom System provides 24 stations with one-way, two-way, group call and all call pages. station can be programmed for one-way or two-way communication. The stations may be grouped into one- page groups. The system also provides the ability for a remote speaker location equipped with a call button to the attendant location. The attendant receives calling speaker identification when using a Caller ID equipped or a Caller ID display. V-2924 is compatible with standard 45 ohm speakers and one-way amplified speakers and can be accessed via a line phone, E-Key line port or PABX loop start trunk port. An RS-232 port on the control unit provides a for a serial printer for printout of system activity. V-2924 provides a background music input and is designed to automatically mute music during a page. The system also provides four (4) contact closures associated with the last 4 zones to allow for door strike plate Multiple V-2924 control units can be interconnected to allow global all call and global priority pages for to six (6) V-2924 control units. Manuals Online! – V-2924 Control Unit provides access to 24 stations. A V-2925 Expansion Unit is available for the V-2924. V-2925 Expansion Unit will increase the capacity of the V-2924 by twenty-four (24) additional stations. Up three (3) Expansion Units can be added to a system for a total of 48, 72, or 96 zones of paging. V-2926 Plug-in Option Board is also available to provide enhanced Caller ID, flexible architectural numbering, defined page groups, a secondary serial port for easier programming and real-time clock. A Windows-based tool is used with the option board to simplify system programming. The tool can be used with PC computers using the Microsoft Windows operating system. To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this appliance to rain or Shock hazard Do Not Open. Risque de choc Electrique ne pas Ouvrir. Corriente Electrica No Abres. zones of handsfree or one-way (expandable up to 96 zones) Built-in handsfree amplifier Background music input Built-in all call with me and me in from speaker locations Calls placed in queue Dial tone programmable (On/Off) Alert tone Ringback tone Repeated alert/privacy tone programmable Auxiliary contact closures for zones 21, 22, 23, input Programmable ring pattern Ring contact closure follows ring cycle Caller identification RS-232 serial printer port Control unit is internally powered (battery compatible; (1) VPB-260 per unit) Override port Emergency tone input Time tone input UNA contact closure input All call/priority page through up to six V-2924 of any size Group call Programmable class of service The V-2924 is a single talkpath unit. The maximum number of speakers per zone: 45 ohm speaker and/or forty (40) one-way speakers. SPECIFICATIONS units are not intended for direct or indirect to the public telephone network. When with a customer premise telephone system such a key system or PABX system, these units are to the system via a fully protective paging or a system c

VSP-V-2925A 3 INTERCOM SYSTEM – ADD ON EXPANSION UNIT THE V-2924A basic V-2924A Talkback Intercom System provides 24 stations with one-way, two-way, group call and all call The V-2925A Expansion Unit is an add on unit for the V-2924A. Each V-2925A Expansion Unit will the V-2924A by twenty-four (24) additional stations. Up to three (3) Expansion Units can be added to a for a total of 48, 72, or 96 zones of paging. V-2925A can ONLY be used with the V-2924A. If you have the V-2924 model, please contact Technical for assistance. Disconnect main power before servicing. Plug the Expansion Unit into the Control Unit. For the first Expansion Unit, insert the P1 connector from the Unit into the P8 connector on the Control Unit (Refer to Figure 1 for location of connectors). (For additional Expansion Unit, insert P2 into P1 Refer to Figure 1 of the Control Unit document). Close latches attached to the top and bottom of the Expansion Unit over the keepers on the top and bottom of Control Unit. Drill holes into backboard through mounting flanges on the Expansion Unit. screws into holes and tighten screws firmly. Expansion Unit requires (2) 66B type punchdown blocks. Mount these on the backboard near the associated Unit. Make connections to the punchdown blocks as specified in Figure 2 Punchdown Block Option Switches options programmed for the Control Unit are available on the additional stations provided by the Expansion The only switches on the Expansion Unit requiring attention are those for Background Music. Refer to 1 for location and Table 1 for the default values of these switches. Make changes as desired for the various x 8.37 x 3.06 H x 21.26cm W x 7.77cm D) lbs. (5.0 kg) as Control Unit. V-2924A with V-2925A Expansion Unit. Manuals Online! – 1 – V-2925A CONTROL AND CONNECTOR LOCATIONS View View Connects to the V-2924A Control Unit Connects to an additional V-2925A Expansion Unit Switch Inputs Speaker Outputs AC Switch Backup – BGM Group Select Dip Switch (See Table) Manuals Online! – 2 – PUNCHDOWN BLOCK CONNECTIONS P3 – Switch Inputs #1 #2 #3 Block P4 Speaker Outputs #2 STA49 STA49 STA50 STA50 STA51 STA51 STA52 STA52 STA53 STA53 STA54 STA54 STA55 STA55 STA56 STA56 STA57 STA57 STA58 STA58 STA59 STA59 STA60 STA60 STA61 STA61 STA62 STA62 STA63 STA63 STA64 STA64 STA65 STA65 STA66 STA66 STA67 STA67 STA68 STA68 STA69 STA69 STA70 STA70 STA71 STA71 STA72 STA72

VSP-V-2926 5 INTERCOM SYSTEM OPTION BOARD V-2926 Option Board is an add-on feature for the V-2924 Expandable Zone Talkback Intercom System. The of this board provides the following supplemental features: Time sync output Custom page groups Enhanced Caller ID Flexible Architectural numbering plan to the PC Programming Tool Store user data to EEROM L x 3.0 W x 1.1 D L x 7.62cm W x 2.79cm D) lbs (.41 kg) Real time clock for SMDR printer Auto detect for Com Port or Modem Auto adjust for Daylight Savings Time Evacuation tone to specified groups Time tones to specified groups Read software/firmware revision numbers V-2924 Programming Tool is a windows based tool designed to interface with the V-2926 Option The Option Board and the Programming Tool must both be installed to access the additional features by the Option Board. All features must be set with the Programming Tool when the Option Board and Tool are installed. OF THE OPTION BOARD OF THE PROGRAMMING TOOL 1 – Option Board Location on the Control Board THE PROGRAMMING TOOL Configuration Number and CLID Programming Connection of Service Page Groups Programmed Data to File WITH THE V-2924 Communications Direct Connect, Modem Connect Dialing Method Modem Connect, Manual Connect Data to V-2924/Receive Data from V-2924 System Date and Time Software and Firmware Revision Number Communications OF THE V-2924 MODEM OPTIONS Window, Help, Exit ASSISTANCE, WARRANTY HARDWARE CONNECTIONS 2 2 3 4 4,5 6,7 7,8 8 9 Manuals Online! – OF THE OPTION BOARD Option Board must first be installed on the Control Unit Board (See Figure 1). Disconnect main power before servicing. Remove the side plate and top cover of the Control Unit and set aside. Slide small side plate upward to provide opening for Option Board connector (See Figure 1). Align J3 on the Option Board directly over J1 on the Control Board Align J4 on the Option Board directly over JP2 on the Control Board. Press Option Board firmly in place to make sure connectors are seated properly. Replace the top cover and side plate of the Control Unit and plug in the power supply. Plug PC Communication Cable (included) into P1, PC Programming Port (located on the Option Board – See 1). V-2926 Option Board requires the use of the PC Programming Tool to access the various features it provides. OF THE PROGRAMMING TOOL Computer Requirements for the Valcom V-2924 Programming Tool: (higher is recommended) Hard drive with 30 Mbytes free Mouse Mbytes of RAM (more is recommended) available serial communication port System: The Programming Tool is 32-bit and requires Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows NT 4.0. Rev 2 Programming Tool is compatible with previous versions of hardware, however, the new hardware is compatible with previous versions of the Programming Tool. programming tool software is furnished on 1.4 MB disks and must be installed to the hard drive. To install the On the taskbar, click the Start button disk 1 Select Run Type a: (Assuming a: is the disk drive being used) Follow on-screen instructions for full installation, changing disks as the prompt requests The Valcom V-2924 Programming Tool will automatically appear in the Programs list Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – THE PROGRAMMING TOOL On the taskbar, click the Start button, point to Programs, select Valcom V-2924 Programming Tool. The V-2924 Programming Tool splash screen appears momentarily and then the Programming screen into view Configuration begin the programming process, click on File. A pull-down menu appears allowin

VSP-V-2952 4 TUNER V-2952 FM Tuner may be used to provide a source for both background music for a paging and music-on-hold for a telephone system. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain FM Tuner. Valcom Paging Systems Stand Alone Background Music Systems Music-On-Hold Two individual outputs each with volume control Output 1: .5 watt Output 2: Line level speaker for monitoring Separate bass and treble tone controls Frequency locked loop tuning system External antenna provided On/Off switch Power on indicator Powered by Vdc or Vdc Power jack for use with receptacle mount power Wall or shelf mount Local/Distant Signal reception switch Vdc power supply available (VP-412A) V-2952 will drive one 8 Ohm or six 45 Ohm from the .5 watt output. V-2952 will drive up to 150 Valcom one-way speakers from the line output. H x 8.25″ W x 1.55″ D H x 20.96cm W x 3.94cm D) lbs (.59kg) Temperature: Humidity: to 40 Degrees C to 85% non-precipitating (Nominal) Frequency tuning range: 87.5 MHz to 108.5 MHz Power Output: watt (at 8 ohms) dB (line out) than 2% @ rated output S/N Ratio: Distortion: Requirements Voltage: Current: Input 1: Vdc Input 2: Vdc mA Manuals Online! – Arrangement a Vdc power adapter is used, begin with Step For power connections using a power start at Step 2. (Refer to Figure 1) Vdc power adapter into receptacle on the V-2952 (Go to Step 4). Vdc “-” from power supply to 24 Vdc terminal on the V-2952. GND “+” from power supply to the 24 Vdc terminal on the V-2952. The Vdc inputs are not polarity 5. When the V-2952 is connected to V-9941A, the V-2952 is being connected to a page control or amplified paging connect the Output marked to the background music input of paging system or directly to the speakers. the output marked “0.5 W” to the terminals of the V-9941A. the V-2952 is connected to a telephone for music-on-hold, connect the marked “0.5 W” to the music-on- input of the telephone system. external antenna is supplied. Install the balun transformer and dipole as shown in Figure 1 or connect a supplied antenna with coax cable the “F” connector. 1. 2. 3. 4. 6. 7. Procedure setup procedure for the V-2952 is as follows to Figure 2). 1. With the power supply connected, turn 2. 3. 4. 5. switch “ON.” EXT/INT switch to “INT.” 0.5 W volume control turn tuning knob to desired FM station. EXT/INT switch to “EXT” position adjust appropriate output volume control desired levels for background music or Adjust V-2952 Bass and controls to desired tone of music. distortion occurs due to close proximity of a strong station move the LOCAL/DISTANT switch to “LOCAL” position. (Refer to Figure 1) ASSISTANCE in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and a set available and be calling from the job site. Call 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or call 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating your company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service for a of one ye

VSP-V-2970 2 CALL SWITCH VOLUME CONTROL V-2970 is an Emergency/Normal Call Switch Volume Control designed to be used with the V- and V-2925 Page Control Units. The V-2970 provided with an “Emergency” call button and a call button for connection to customer signaling equipment. “Emergency” button transposes a single press of button into the four required closures required to an “Emergency” class of service call. The call button allows a “Normal” class of call. x 2.75 x 1.0 H x 6.98cm W x 2.54cm D) lbs. (.09 kg) Designed to fit a single-gang electrical box No external power source required Red “Emergency” button for emergency call Black “Call” button for normal call Built-in Volume Control Connect switch inputs from control unit to V- as shown in connection diagram. Connect Tip and Ring from control unit to V- as shown in connection diagram. Connect V-2970 to Tip and Ring of 45 ohm Speaker. Press either call button to test loudness of tone at and adjust volume of tone through cut- on the front of the V-2970 enclosure using a flat tip screwdriver. Place V-2970 over standard single-gang box and fasten in place using the two provided. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that power is being to the unit and there are no shorts or grounds cabling. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and telephone test set available and be calling from the site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical or (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will subject to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 CONNECTIONS ear of Unit) olum e Control ohm pot) c c es s ible from and rear unit -2924/2925 S W -2924/2925 S W peak er Tip In peak er Ring In O ut O ut O HM TA LK B A CK P E A K E R CO NNE CTIO NS NTRO L UNIT NNE CTIO NS Manuals Online! –

VSP-V-2971 2 SWITCH WITH VOLUME CONTROL V-2971 Call Switch with Volume Control designed to be used with Talkback Page Units with the remote calling feature. The provides a call button for connection to provided signaling equipment. H x 2.75 W x 1.0 D H x 6.99cm W x 2.54cm D) lbs. (.09 kg) Designed to fit in a standard single-gang box No external power source required Black “Call” button for normal call Built-in Volume Control Connect switch inputs from control unit to V- as shown in connection diagram. Connect audio Tip and Ring from control unit to as shown in connection diagram. Connect V-2971 to audio Tip and Ring of 45 Talkback Speaker. Press call button to test loudness of tone at and adjust volume of tone through cut- on the front of the V-2971 enclosure using a flat tip screwdriver. Place V-2971 over standard single-gang box and fasten in place using the two provided. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that power is being to the unit and there are no shorts or grounds cabling. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and telephone test set available and be calling from the site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical or (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will subject to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

VSP-V-400 5 DESK PAGING MICROPHONE instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain V-400 Dynamic Desk Paging Microphone. Valcom Paging Systems Dynamic element Omnidirectional pickup pattern Cycolac housing with die cast base Push to Talk push bar with lock Heavy duty four conductor shielded cable Low impedance (balanced) x 4.0″W x 6.0″D H x 10.16cm W x 15.24cm D) lbs. (.64 kg) Element Pattern Freq. Response Output Impedance Output Level to 12K Hz Z 400 OHMS Z -58 dB = 1 mw/10 microbars) dB EIA 1 (on reverse) depicts the V-400 connected to Valcom V-9939A microphone adapter. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify the unit is turned on there are no broken connections leading to this Assistance in troubleshooting is available from factory. When calling, you should have a VOM a test set available and be calling from the job Call (540) 427-3900, and ask for a Technical or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating your company name, address, phone contact person and the nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

VSP-V-450 5 OMNIDIRECTIONAL MICROPHONE instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain V-450 Dynamic Omnidirectional Gooseneck Valcom Paging Systems Dynamic element Omnidirectional pickup pattern Chrome screen with a black housing foot, 4 conductor, 2 shield cable permanently Pushbutton sealed microswitch mounting thread Mounting flange included Low impedance (balanced) Microphone 1-3/4″D x 4-5/8″L Gooseneck 19″L lbs. (.59kg) Specifications Element Pattern Freq. Response Output Impedance Output Level to 12K Hz Z 400 Ohms Z -58 dB = 1 mw/10 microbars) dB EIA 1 shows the V-450 connected to the Valcom microphone adapter. ASSISTANCE in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and a set available and be calling from the job site. (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating your company name, address, phone contact person and the nature of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – (cid:4)(cid:5) (cid:13)(cid:7)(cid:14) (cid:12)(cid:11)(cid:15) Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit and the Troubleshooting Chart. Assistance in troubleshooting is available from factory. When calling, you should have a Volt-ohm meter and a lineman test set and be calling from the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated Support visit our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESK SPEAKER NO. V-762 6 TALKBACK DESK SPEAKER Desk Speaker, V-762, is a 45 ohm talkback speaker designed to be used with talkback control units. The volume may be adjusted with the on the front of the housing. The V-762 requires no additional power. V-762-BK V-762-W V-762-GY connections as shown below using standard, twisted telephone cable. Limit cable run to 800 foot maximum. Valcom Talkback Page Control – Green – Red CHART Connection x 5.1 x 3.2 H x 12.9cm W x 8.1cm D) lbs. (.32 kg) V-762 can be used on a desk or wall mounted. The front cover can be to match positioning. Four rubber feet are included with the V-762 prevent movement on a desk surface. hole patterns are located on the inside rear surface of the enclosure for mounting. When wall mounting, remove the front cover, mount and the front cover. Use a 11/32 drill bit to drill the center hole and a bit to drill either of the outer holes. the V-762 volume control at rotation. Adjust transmit/receive on the talkback control, then fine tune the volume control on the as needed. Adjustment of the volume control raises and lowers the reply level the page control is in the receive mode. The V-762 will not increase transmit or receive level beyond the setting on the page control unit. Sound Causes and Corrections that volume control is turned up. a lineman test set, check for the proper audio on the T & R leads, and if necessary also at the that volume control is turned up. a lineman test set, check for the proper audio on the T & R leads, and if necessary also at the volume of speaker. speaker in different direction. speaker to location further from phone. confidencer on phone in severe problem area.

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit and the Troubleshooting Chart. Assistance in troubleshooting is available from factory. When calling, you should have a Volt-ohm meter and a lineman test set and be calling from the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship conditions of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that sealed units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will be to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for parts labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, consequential loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Claims for such should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESK SPEAKER NO. V-763 6 ONE-WAY AMPLIFIED DESK SPEAKER Desk Speaker, V-763, is self-amplified and may be used to provide paging any one-way or talkback page control. The volume may be adjusted with the on the front of the housing. The V-763 requires Vdc, 50mA (1 Valcom unit). V-763-BK V-763-W V-763-GY SPECIFICATIONS Impedance: level: at Vdc: Ohm nominal dBm nominal x 5.1 x 3.2 D H x 12.9cm W x 8.1cm D) lbs. (.27 kg) connections as shown below using standard, twisted telephone cable. Limit the of speakers to 5 per 500 foot run. Do not connect this speaker directly to 25/70/100V amplifier as to both the amplifier and speaker may occur. A V-1095 may be to allow the use of Valcom self-amplified speakers on 70V speaker V-763 can be used on a desk or wall mounted. The front cover may be rotated match positioning. Four rubber feet are included with the V-763 to prevent on a desk surface. hole patterns are located on the inside rear surface of the enclosure for wall When wall mounting, remove the front cover, mount and replace the front Use a 11/32 drill bit to drill the center hole and a 3/16 bit to drill either of outer holes. CHART Audio from Causes and Corrections that volume control is turned up (clockwise). a lineman test set, check for the proper audio on the Tip/A & Ring/B le

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit and the Troubleshooting Chart. Assistance in troubleshooting is available from factory. When calling, you should have a Volt-ohm meter and a lineman test set and be calling from the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship conditions of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that sealed units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will be to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for parts labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, consequential loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Claims for such should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESK SPEAKER WITH CALL BUTTON NO. V-764 2 TALKBACK DESK SPEAKER WITH CALL BUTTON V-764, Valcom Desk Speaker, is a 45 Ohm talkback speaker with call button to be used with Valcom talkback control units. The volume be adjusted with the knob on the front of the housing. The V-764 requires no power. V-764-BK V-764-W V-764-GY are accomplished via an RJ11C connector. A 7 ft. silver satin modular is supplied to accomplish these connections. runs should be limited to 800 foot maximum from the talkback control unit Cat 3 or 5, twisted telephone cable. Connection x 5.1 x 3.2 H x 12.9cmW x 8.1cmD) lbs. (.32 kg) V-764 can be used on a desk or wall mounted. The front cover may be to match positioning. Four rubber feet are included with the V-764 to movement on a desk surface. hole patterns are located on the inside rear surface of the enclosure for mounting. When wall mounting, remove the front cover, mount and the front cover. Use a 11/32 drill bit to drill the center hole and a bit to drill either of the outer holes. the V-764 volume control to rotation. Adjust transmit/receive on the talkback control, then fine tune the volume control on the as needed. Typical adjustment of receive volume control is 1/3 and transmit volume control is 2/3 rotation. Adjustment of the volume control raises and lowers the reply voice when the page c

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit and the Troubleshooting Chart. Assistance in troubleshooting is available from factory. When calling, you should have a Volt-ohm meter and a lineman test set and be calling from the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship conditions of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that sealed units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will be to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for parts labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, consequential loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Claims for such should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESK SPEAKER WITH CALL BUTTON NO. V-764 2 TALKBACK DESK SPEAKER WITH CALL BUTTON V-764, Valcom Desk Speaker, is a 45 Ohm talkback speaker with call button to be used with Valcom talkback control units. The volume be adjusted with the knob on the front of the housing. The V-764 requires no power. V-764-BK V-764-W V-764-GY are accomplished via an RJ11C connector. A 7 ft. silver satin modular is supplied to accomplish these connections. runs should be limited to 800 foot maximum from the talkback control unit Cat 3 or 5, twisted telephone cable. Connection x 5.1 x 3.2 H x 12.9cmW x 8.1cmD) lbs. (.32 kg) V-764 can be used on a desk or wall mounted. The front cover may be to match positioning. Four rubber feet are included with the V-764 to movement on a desk surface. hole patterns are located on the inside rear surface of the enclosure for mounting. When wall mounting, remove the front cover, mount and the front cover. Use a 11/32 drill bit to drill the center hole and a bit to drill either of the outer holes. the V-764 volume control to rotation. Adjust transmit/receive on the talkback control, then fine tune the volume control on the as needed. Typical adjustment of receive volume control is 1/3 and transmit volume control is 2/3 rotation. Adjustment of the volume control raises and lowers the reply voice when the page c

T ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken connections to the unit. in troubleshooting is available from the factory. When calling, you should a VOM and a lineman test set available and be calling from the job site. Call 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom Automated Support or visit our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not filed repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating your name, address, phone number, contact person, and the nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship conditions of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair refund of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that sealed units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and labor will applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to additional charges for and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in with the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a is received in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 INSTRUCTIONS FOR MOUNT RESISTANT SPEAKER MODEL NO. V-9010 3 VANDAL RESISTANT SPEAKER Valcom Surface Mount, Vandal Resistant Speaker, V-9010, was designed to be in harsh environments. The speaker assembly features a steel housing, a built-in an interior security screen and tamper resistant screws. steel housing is constructed of 18 gauge steel finished, with a baked on powder urethane finish. The screen is made of 24 gauge steel to prevent sharp object penetrating the speakers. making connections to the speaker, secure the enclosure assembly to the base four #10 stainless steel hex button head machine screws using a standard 1/8″ hex base of the V-9010 will mount to a standard 4-inch square or octagon-shaped box, or may be fastened to a wall or ceiling using screws as large as Surface wiring or conduit is routed through one of four standard knockouts. Rating: Watt Voltage: Consumption: ma Response: Power: Hz – 6.5 kHz Watt dB at 1 Watt, 1 Meter Coil Weight: Material: Ohm oz. The V-9010 may be used to expand a constant voltage (25/70/100 volt) system without placing an additional load on the amplifier by adding a V- 70V Paging Expander. A power supply will also be required. Page Control -24 Vdc Power Supply Dia. x 5.1 (21.59cm Dia. x 12.95cm D) lbs. (2.18 kg)

VSP-V-9020 5 CEILING SPEAKER V-9020 Ceiling Speaker is designed to easily into standard T-Bar suspended ceilings by 1/2 of a 2 x 2 ceiling tile (or 1/4 of a 2 x 4 The 1 x 2 perforated grille provides increased dispersion over conventional round speaker and blends into the ceiling by providing the of a standard air return. speaker assembly features a perforated steel finished with a durable white epoxy powder and an 8 inch full-range speaker. The V-9020 is with a single input 1 watt amplifier and on 24 Vdc. A 24 T-Bar is included to the area where the speaker assembly and ceiling meet. Perforated steel grille with white epoxy paint (20.32cm) speaker L x 11.82 W x 3.4 D L x 30cm W x 8.6cm D) lbs. (2.95) Kg. Specifications Rating Voltage/Current at 1 meter w/1 watt input Continuous Vdc, 50 mA dB to 50 Deg. C (32 to 122 Deg. F) to 85% non-precipitating area covered by the V-9020 Ceiling Speaker is by the height of the ceiling. If the ceiling is 8 the speaker will cover 250 sq. ft. With a height of 9 to 15 feet, the speaker will cover sq. ft. If the ceiling is 16 to 25 feet high, the will cover 850 sq. ft. mounting in a 2 x 2 tile ceiling, cut ceiling in half. (When mounting in a 2 x 4 tile, remove of the tile). Make connections and lay speaker on grid. Slide T-Bar under edge of speaker. remainder of cut tile next to speaker. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that there are no connections leading to this unit. Assistance in is available from the factory. Call 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated or visit our website at Manuals Online! – equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and nature of the problem. the unit to: Inc. & Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss

Hollins Road ! Roanoke, VA, USA ! Phone 540.427.3900 ! FAX 540.427.3517 CONNECTIONS CONNEXIONS Option / Opci Connections / Conexiones / Connexions Volume / Volumen MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING TESTS AND RATINGS: E84 FLAME AND SMOKE TEST 3 HOUR BURN for use in the City of Los Angeles – RR7811 IN USA 0 181 Manuals Online! –

1111 Industry Avenue ! Roanoke, VA, USA ! Phone 540.427.3900 ! FAX 540.427.3517 CONNECTIONS CONNEXIONS Option / Opci Connections / Conexiones / Connexions Volume / Volumen MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING TESTS AND RATINGS: E84 FLAME AND SMOKE TEST 3 HOUR BURN for use in the City of Los Angeles – RR7811 IN USA 181 Manuals Online! –

Technical Manuals Online! –

Hollins Road ! Roanoke, VA, USA ! Phone 540.427.3900 ! FAX 540.427.3517 Option / Opci Connections / Conexiones / Connexions MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING TESTS AND RATINGS: E84 FLAME AND SMOKE TEST 3 HOUR BURN 181 for use in the City of Los Angeles – RR7811 IN USA 0 Manuals Online! –

1111 Industry Avenue ! Roanoke, VA, USA ! Phone 540.427.3900 ! FAX 540.427.3517 Option / Opci Connections / Conexiones / Connexions MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE FOLLOWING TESTS AND RATINGS: E84 FLAME AND SMOKE TEST 3 HOUR BURN for use in the City of Los Angeles – RR7811 IN USA 181 Manuals Online! –

DIMENSIONS/WEIGHT x 2.75 x 2.05 H x 6.99cm W x 5.21cm D) lbs. (.32 kg) INSTRUCTIONS FOR MOUNTING BRACKET LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship conditions of normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair refund of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the shipment, product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and factory sealed units are unopened (A service charge plus parts and will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units ‘out of warranty’ are subject to a service charge. The service will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be subject to charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for any anticipated profits, damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in with the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product received in damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. Claims for damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the F.O.B. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 NO. V-9804 2 USED WITH THE V-1080, V-1090 FLEXHORN USED WITH THE V-1440 MONITOR SPEAKER

VSP-V-9805 3 RESISTANT ENCLOSURE NUT PLACES) x 1″ STEEL SCREWS V-1080 V-1090 CAGE NUT PLACES) STEEL GRILLE PHMS REQ ASSEMBLY SHIPPING ONLY x 11 x 4 H x 27.94cm W x 10.16cm D) lbs. (3.4 kg) Manuals Online! – N C L O S U R E N C L O S U R E UG H-IN DIM ENSIO NS ASSISTANCE is available from the factory when problems are encountered. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical or (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24 hour Automated Support or visit our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should repairs necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the of the problem. Send the unit to the Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 LIMITED WARRANTY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment, product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened. (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, All units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs. (Major repairs will be to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada: Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

VSP-V-9806 2 STEEL GRILLE ASSEMBLY STEEL SCREWS V-1080 V-1090 NUT WASHER NUT H x 11 H x 27.94cm W) lbs. (.91 kg) Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE is available from the factory when problems are encountered. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical or (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24 hour Automated Support or visit our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should repairs necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the of the problem. Send the unit: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment, product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened. (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, All units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs. (Major repairs will be to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable for anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the purchase, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada: Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

VSP-V-9816M 3 SPEAKER MOUNTING ENCLOSURE Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE is available from the factory when are encountered. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and for a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, or refund of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will subject to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

Issue 7 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Number (5 per box) (5 per box) (1 per box) * (5 per box) with this Speaker V-1020KNOB, V-1060A/B, V-1220 V-1020KNOB, V-1060A/B, V-1220 use the V-9915M-5 Backbox with the V-1010C Speaker, it is necessary use the V-9904M-5 Bridge. The backbox may be used alone with the V-1060A/B or the V-1220 as long as provisions are made to the weight of the assembly. ASSISTANCE is available from the factory when problems are encountered. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should repairs necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and for a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, or refund of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will subject to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

Issue 7 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Number (5 per box) (5 per box) (1 per box) * (5 per box) with this Speaker V-1020KNOB, V-1060A/B, V-1220 V-1020KNOB, V-1060A/B, V-1220 use the V-9915M-5 Backbox with the V-1010C Speaker, it is necessary use the V-9904M-5 Bridge. The backbox may be used alone with the V-1060A/B or the V-1220 as long as provisions are made to the weight of the assembly. ASSISTANCE is available from the factory when problems are encountered. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should repairs necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact person, and the of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and for a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, or refund of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will subject to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

VSP-V-9923B 3 CALL UNIT manual provides instructions for identification, operation, and technical assistance for the V-9923B Code Call Unit. V-9923B provides two or three digit code call via a loop start trunk port on a PABX or by use of a spare line button on a key system. V-9923B code call unit complies with Part 68 of FCC Rules and Regulations and has been granted Registration #BAFUSA-68753-KX-N. The equivalence is 0.1B and the unit requires a RJ21X connector. accordance with FCC Rules and applicable tariffs, code call unit may only be installed with the of the owner of the host system. FCC Registration #BAFUSA-68753-KX-N, will listed in the affidavits filed with the telephone it will also be recorded in the system log by installation and maintenance personnel. The telephone company is to be notified of the FCC number when this code call unit is V-9923B is capable of providing code signaling paging purposes; it provides for “meet me” of code call and provides talk circuit and tone. Trunk level access on PABX station level Can be used with 1A2 type key systems Uses rotary or tone dial signaling two digit codes or 729 three digit codes Dial tone to calling party Coded tone output for paging systems Switch controlled code verification tone Automatically discontinues code sending when Capable of being used with another V-9923B to two link operation Uses standard 1A2 key system voltages Mounts on the wall, in a key cabinet, or in the Cabinet V-9923B Code Call Unit provides the necessary for 1 link of code call. For an additional of code call, another V-9923B is required (two maximum). x 5.9″W x 2.1″D H x 14.99cm W x 5.33cm D) Requirements Valcom V-9923B requires Vdc talk and Vdc signal battery. The current and voltage range is shown in Table 1. Manuals Online! – 1 Range Idle Operating Battery Battery to Vdc 65mA to Vdc 125mA Timing and Frequency timing and frequency specifications of the V-9923B code call unit are shown in Table Figure 1 is a timing chart showing the nominal of a code call. 2 Tone Frequency Tone Frequency Tones Broadcast between tones in a sequence between digits in a sequence between series of digits Hz Hz ms ms sec sec Valcom V-9923B will detect 20-30 Hz ringing the answer port. The applied ringing voltage be 75 to 125 Vac. V-9923B provides two or three digit code call via a loop start trunk port on a PABX or by use of a spare line button on a key system. Figure is a simplified block diagram showing the code call and its connections. The code call unit is designed so that it will a code call sequence before resetting and dial tone, even if all parties hang up. systems and PABX used in: Department stores/shopping centers Hospitals, nursing homes Noisy locations, manufacturing plants Schools, universities Materials Required equipment is required to complete a when using the V-9923B. These items are: Vdc power supply (if existing supply or non-existent) type connecting block pair cable with a female amphenol connector one end pair crossconnect wire sec. sec. ON sec. sec. sec. OFF BEGINS 1 BEGINS AGAIN UNTIL OR PARTY ON HOOK Manuals Online! – LOOP CO TRUNK PORT ER PORT LINE BUTTON KEY TELEPHONE W ITH PBX W ITH 1A2 KEY SYSTEM CALL AG BB BG LS EP2 Vdc AND Vac POW ER SUPPLIES NEXT V-9923B CALL UNIT IF EQUIPPED 2

VSP-V-9924B 4 AUDIBLE RINGING UNIT Common Audible Ringing Unit provides an signal over the paging system when there is incoming call. It is used between a telephone and the public address system. PABX Station Port Electronic Key System Station Port Contact Closure Bell/Buzzer ICM Activates via ringing voltage, buzzer voltage or Capable of switching signal to 3 zones closure Uses standard 1A2 key system voltages Each zone is equipped with a 5 watt amplifier volume control Contains a punchdown block as part of the unit Compact size, can be mounted on wall or in Automatically switches paging speakers from system to audible signal of the V-9924B the ring interval of the incoming call Variable pitch control Auxiliary contact closure power supply Materials Required Cat 3 or 5 twisted pair telephone cable Mounting screws and hardware x 4.55″W x 2.3″D H x 11.56cm W x 5.84cm D) lbs. (.59kg) Requirements V-9924B requires a -24VDC “B” battery and 50 mA idle and 300 mA maximum operating. Requirements V-9924B requires interrupted ringing or buzzer or dry contact closure to operate. The output the V-9924B will follow the interruptions of the The ringing voltage should be approximately and the current requirement would be 8 mA. buzzer voltage should be approximately 18VAC the current requirement would be 10 mA. The pulls approximately 3mA through a dry closure for activation. Ringing and buzzer cannot be applied simultaneously. Use only method of activation. Manuals Online! – Key COMMON SIG SIG UNA or Ring Closure BATT 1 NO 1 COM 1 NC 2 NO 2 COM 2 NC 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 T IN R IN T OUT R OUT T IN R IN T OUT R OUT T IN R IN T OUT R OUT Page Unit for Zone Page Unit for Zone Page Unit for Zone 1 – SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM to observe the following precautions could in damage to the V-9924B and other Unplug the power supply when connecting the leads and signal leads to the unit. These are brought in on adjacent terminals. bridging of these two terminals could the equipment. Use pared crossconnect wire for all voice and voltages. Set all volume controls to their minimum clockwise) level. the metal mounting plate from the rear of the enclosure. Using two #6 wood screws, the plate in a vacant space on the backboard the telephone system common equipment. Both holes must be utilized to insure secure of the unit. See Figure 1A. the V-9924B enclosure to access connections option switches. Slide the rear of the unit the board) onto the mounting plate and lock place with screw provided. Make connections. Connections V-9924B can be activated via ringing voltage, voltage, or a dry contact closure. When used buzzer voltage, apply one side of the pair to SIG (pin 11 or 26) and the other side of the to 18VAC SIG (pin 12 or 27). For ringing connections, put one side of the pair on SIG (pin 11 or 26) and the other side of the to 105VAC SIG (pin 13 or 28). The V-9924B also be activated by connecting one side of a dry closure to pin 7 and the other side of the dry to pin 22. Connections V-9924B Common Audible Ringing Unit is of switching up to 3 zones of speakers to the signal generated by the unit. The device is to be placed in series with the speakers. 1 IN (pins 16 and 17) are connected to the output leads of the page control. Zone OUT (pins 1 and 2) are connected to the speakers. 2 and 3 hook up in a similar fashion. Refer to 3 for pin numbers. Connections -24VDC from the power supply to pin 15 or on the crossconnect block a

VSP-V-9925A 6 WARBLE RINGER WITH VOLUME CONTROL WATT – 24VDC instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain V-9925A, 5 Watt Loud Warble Ringer with control. V-9925A Loud Warble Ringer is a self-contained watt electronic ringer which can be used for either or exterior signaling applications. The unit is to allow a loud warble to be broadcast as as input signal is present. The input signal be interrupted or controlled by the ringing Loud speaker tone signaling for key systems, PABXs. Outside signaling for incoming calls into a key Signaling in a noisy environment. watt amplifier Volume control High efficiency horn Tone generation circuitry to the following table for speaker coverage. first number given is the side to side distance for the speakers. It is also the distance in front the speaker that you can expect to hear a good signal. The second number is the area being in square feet. Noisy ft. ft. ft. ft. sq. ft. sq. ft. sq. ft. sq. ft. Temperature: Humidity: to +55 degrees C to 95% non-precipitating x 8.2″W x 10.4″D, plus mounting base H x 20.83cm W x 26.42cm D) lbs. (1.63kg) Requirements Power Supply Signal Source Vdc, 500 mA (“B” Battery) Valcom power units) Vac or 20 Vac Manuals Online! – Connection to an electrical backbox is by channeling wire through the of the base and making appropriate (See Figure 2). The base has holes for a double-gang square box, but by out additional knockout holes, the base be mounted to a single-gang or octagon box. V-9925A may be rotated or moved up and down obtain the desired position by loosening the knob Figures 1 & 2) at the bottom of the unit 1 turn. Make required adjustment and knob. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify Vdc power is applied to the unit and that the white wire has Vdc battery and the black wire is at ground Using a VOM, verify that 105 Vac or 20 is being applied to the signal leads. Check the adjustment on the control unit to make certain is set at the proper level. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and a test set available and be calling from the site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: and Return Dept. Inc. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Requirements to the small amount of signal and power wiring may be accomplished through station other suitable wire. When using “D” type station limit the wire run to 500 feet. Two Loud Ringers may be connected to the same if the total run length is less than 250 feet. a remote power unit is used, signal input leads be limited to 5000 feet and a maximum of 6 station or other suitable wire to the leads as Vdc Common Vac input Vac input Use either the 105 Vac or 20 Vac input, not used in conjunction with a buzzer, connect the leads to the brown and green leads. When with a ringer, connect the ringer leads to the and red leads. Speaker to Base For ease of installation, the base can be to the speaker before or after the base is Loosen position adjustment knob. the ball of the base into the socket of the Tighten the position adjustment knob. V-9925A should be mounted 16 to 40 feet above floor to allow for best sound distribution. The can be mounted to a wall,

VSP-V-9927A 3 MULTI-TONE GENERATOR V-9927A was designed with ease of installation flexibility in mind. Connections are by screw located on the edge of the PCB. The options and tones are set using option blocks inside the enclosure on the PC Board. V-9927A is a microprocessor controlled multi- generator capable of producing a variety of tone for various applications. It is functional and compatible with the previous V-9927. check all wiring as connections to the unit different). equipment has been tested and found to comply the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to reasonable protection against harmful when this equipment is operated in a environment. This equipment generates, and can radiate radio frequency and, if not installed and used in accordance the instruction manual, may cause harmful to radio communications. Operation of equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user will be to correct the interference at his/her own Dimensions: 8.2 X 4.55 X 2.3 (20.83cm H x 11.56cm W x 5.84cm D) Requirements: -24VDC Battery @ 100mA Environment: Temperature: 0-50 degrees C Humidity: 0-85% non-condensing Input/Output Specifications: Input Impedance: 600 Ohms Output Impedance: Less than 4 Ohms Min. Output Load Impedance: 20 Ohms Audio Input: 0dBm Nominal Max. Tone Output: > 1Vrms/single tone 1.5 lbs (.68 kg) is intended for wall mounting only. When mounting, open enclosure and remove circuit board. Screw back enclosure to backboard near the telephone system common equipment. Snap circuit board back in place. Both holes must be utilized to insure secure mounting of the unit. connections and set tones, using option blocks, as required for the specific application (Refer to Tone Table on 2 for tone descriptions). cover and plug in power supply. Manuals Online! – Tones (except Code Call) of the V-9927A is accomplished by applying a connection between the COM (Common) terminal on the block and the desired tone # (1-8). Tone selected by terminal #1 has priority over others. If multiple tone inputs are being used, it is possible to tones by closing the appropriate contacts in the desired sequence. However, Tone #1 will always be placed on the list when it has been activated. multiple tones are selected at the same time, the LOWEST tone number will have priority. If the lowest contact is then the next lowest tone number will be activated. a Tone is activated the INPUT source will be faded out in 0.75 seconds if P5 is out or will be faded out in seconds if P5 is IN. V-9927A has a buffer for 32 tones. If more than 32 tones are entered within a short period, the V-9927A drop the last tone entered . 2 illustrates several of the ways the V-9927A can be used with other Valcom equipment. Call Operation the V-9927A is connected to the V-9923A code call unit, the V-9927A will respond to the contact closure and issue single chimes in response (See Figure 2). the beginning of a Code Call sequence, the INPUT source will be faded down about 6dB. It will remain at this until the CODE CALL sequence has completed (including the interdigit time). At that time, the INPUT source be faded back up to normal level. using the CODE CALL option with other tone options, the CODE CALL may be interrupted to place other in the sequence (including Tone #1 with higher priority). However, the CODE CALL may be out of sequence the period that this occur. ON TABLE – TONE 1 – TONE 2 – TONE 3 – TONE 4 – TONE 5 – TONE 6 – TONE 7 – TONE 8 – TONE 1 – TONE 2 – TONE 3 – TONE 4 – TONE 5 – TONE 6 – TONE 7 – TONE 8 WHOOP, 698 Hz, 3.9 sec (approx.)/cycle 2 cycle min. DUAL CHIME, 880 Hz/698 Hz BURST, 880 Hz, 1/2 sec on, 2 min. STEADY, 880 Hz, 3 sec. min. 986/784 Hz, 11/sec, 10 minimum 986, 784, 659, 523 Hz order 880, 698, 587, 494 Hz order CALL CHIME, 784 Hz (V-9923A standard) SIREN, 659 Hz, center 1 cycle approx. 0.3 Hz WHOOP (yelp) 659 Hz, 2.5 Hz, 4 min. WARBL

VSP-V-9932 9 SENSING VOLUME CONTROL V-9932 is designed to electronically adjust the of a page by monitoring ambient noise levels in area of a building. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain V-9932 Noise Sensing Volume Control. V-9932 provides automatic paging level in areas where ambient noise levels are changing. Valcom one-way paging systems Solid-state design Low power requirements Operates on key system voltages Self-contained sensing device V-9932 will control up to 150 Valcom one-way speaker assemblies in a single zone. V-9932 units can be used within the same Materials Required the time of installation, the installer should provide following materials: power supply (if existing supply is type station wire V-9932 is designed to be wall mounted. x 4.7 x 2.1″D H x 11.94cm W x 5.33cm D) lbs. (.41kg) Requirements V-9932 requires -24VDC Signal Battery. to -28VDC “B” Battery mA mA Specifications Level Adjustment Range -10dB to 30dB nominal Threshold Output +3dB Response ohms Impedance Impedance ohms Temperature to 50 degrees C signal battery Requirements sec. Reset Manuals Online! – To System Page Unit A Maximum 150 Amplified Speaker Assemblies 1 – Simplified Block Diagram of Connections instructions cover only the installation of the Valcom V-9932. Please consult instructions for control equipment or any equipment used. precautions have been taken at the factory to that the equipment functions properly. Please the following precautions or the equipment be damaged and the warranty voided. Unplug the power supply before connecting any or cables to the control unit connecting With power on, accidental bridging of terminals with a wiring tool may damage circuits. Do not use a lamp tester to check signals. Use a A lamp tester, when first applied is a circuit to electronic circuits. Do not apply power to the control unit until all have been double-checked. The V-9932 cannot be used to control Locate a space on the wall central to the noise equipment. Carefully unpack the unit from the carton and Unsnap cover from base and mount base to wall pan head screws. to Figure 2 while performing the following: Connect the page control unit speaker output to T R input of V-9932. Connect the input of amplified speaker to T and output of V-9932. Connect power supply -24VDC and ground to and GND terminals on V-9932. and Adjustment Complete all connections to page control unit, one-way amplified speakers, and power (refer to applicable instructions). With background noise at its lowest level, access system and adjust level controls on page and speakers for proper sound level. Turn on all noise producing equipment for background noise level. Access page and test. The V-9932 microphone gain is factory This adjustment is correct for most If page volume with maximum background is too turn microphone gain control counter in small increments and test. Wait at least 10 seconds after microphone gain before accessing and testing. If page volume with maximum background noise too low, turn microphone gain control in small increments and test. Wait at least 10 seconds after microphone gain before accessing and testing. Do not adjust microphone beyond the point where the LED lights. Installation and set-up now complete. Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that power is being to the unit and there are no broken

VSP-V-9936A 4 LINE C. O. AUDIBLE RING UNIT V-9936A is a Six Line C. O. Audible Ring Unit be used with Electronic key and PABX telephone instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain Six Line C. O. Audible Ring Unit. installing the V-9936A, notify the local company with the following information: The telephone number of the lines to which the will be connected; The FCC Registration number of the V-9936A, is BAF9I7-12995-RG-N; and The ringer equivalence number (REN): 0.7B. Monitors up to six C. O. Lines or PABX station and gives a common audible tone signal a dry relay contact closure to indicate ring on any of the lines. V-9936A units may be multiplied to supervise lines. Electronic key system C. O. lines PABX trunks PABX station numbers key system C. O. lines Monitors six lines Units may be multiplied for additional lines Provides interrupted electronic warble tone for tone signaling Provides interrupted dry contact closure output to loud bells for a night switch (On/Off switch) Built-in 66 type connection block May be connected to an existing paging system Drives up to 150 Valcom One-Way Amplified Assemblies Drives up to two 45 Ohm Talkback Speakers May be used with One-way or Talkback Paging May be used with 70 Volt Paging Systems Ring tone will override any page in progress Volume control Power reversal indicator Powered by Vdc “B” battery Each V-9936A will provide signaling for six lines or extension numbers Up to four units may be multiplied for of 24 lines May be connected to one zone of a paging The V-9936A will drive two 45 Ohm Talkback or 150 one-way amplified speaker The dry contact closure is rated at 1.0 amp @ Vac, or 2.0 amps @ 24 Vdc. Manuals Online! – x 4.55″W x 2.3″ D H x 11.56cm W x 5.84cm D) lbs. (.68 kg) Requirements to Vdc “B” Battery, 200 mA. max. to 50 Degrees C to 85% non-precipitating. Valcom V-9936A is designed to monitor up to C. O. lines or PABX station numbers and will a common tone signal and contact closure any of the lines are ringing. The V-9936A be used with most telephone systems because it directly to the lines and not to the phones. tone output may be connected to speakers used for ringing, or to one zone of a paging system. dry contact closure may be used to activate loud bells, strobes, or other external equipment. outputs will provide interrupted signals any line is ringing. disable input is provided for connection of a night With no switch connected, the V-9936A signal any time a line rings in. With a switch and providing a short across the disable the unit will be inactive. Ringing following components are required to provide audible ringing over dedicated bells or V-9936A C. O. Ring Units, 1 per 6 lines Signaling Devices consisting of: Two 45 Ohm talkback speakers, or Up to 150 one-way amplified speakers, or Loud bells, buzzers, strobes, etc. as required. Power Supply: The VP-624B will power a using talkback speakers for signaling. one-way speaker assemblies or other signaling are used, additional power may be Over Paging may be connected to one zone of a Valcom or Talkback Paging System, or to the of a high powered amplifier. The following are required: V-9936A C. O. Ring Units, 1 per 6 lines VP-624B Vdc Power Supply (VP-4024B if using more than (3) V-9936A a page is in progress when an incoming call is the ring signal from the V-9936A will override the page. !”(cid:31)#(cid:13)(cid:1

VSP-V-9939A 8 ADAPTOR instructions provide identification, installation, operation, and maintenance information the V-9939A, Microphone Adaptor. V-9939A is a Microphone Adaptor designed to used with Valcom paging equipment. Provides microphone access to Valcom one-way speaker assemblies. Allows local paging access to a zone of one-way speakers. Allows paging access to stand alone systems. to Figure 1 for a block diagram of a typical Works with most microphones with push to talk ohms balanced and 50,000 ohm inputs Built in microphone preamplifier Mounts at microphone location Provides a set of form “C” contacts May be connected to a selected zone of a multi- paging system Screw terminals for all connections V-9939A may be connected to one zone of a system. x 4.7 x 2.1″D cm H x 11.94 cm W x 5.33 cm D) (32kg) Requirements to Vdc filtered “A” Battery, 40 ma. max to 50 Degrees C to 85% non-precipitating Specifications impedance impedance level ohms balanced/ ohms unbalanced ohms nominal DESIGN are two basic ways the V-9939A Microphone may be used: may be used with a V-1094A and Valcom amplified speaker assemblies as a alone paging system. using the V-9939A for access to a stand alone system, the following will be required: V-9939A Microphone Adaptor (push to talk) V-1094A Booster Control Manuals Online! – Valcom one-way amplified speaker assemblies determined by job requirements) Power Supply (type determined by style and of speakers – Consult the Valcom Paging VSP for more information) using the V-9939A with a V-1101A One One-way Page Adaptor or a V-9937 Zone Page Port Adaptor you may disconnect the speakers of one from a multi-zone page adaptor and microphone access to that zone. configurations will allow the to override the telephone These will work only on a zone of paging. (cid:26)(cid:10)(cid:12)(cid:30)(cid:18)(cid:11)(cid:16)!”(cid:21)#(cid:18)(cid:11)(cid:11)(cid:18)#(cid:12)(cid:23)” using the V-9939A to override an existing zone telephone accessed one-way paging, the following be required: V-9939A Microphone Adaptor (push to talk) V-1101A One Zone Page Adaptor V-9937 One Zone Page Port Adaptor An existing Valcom one-way page system configurations are possible. Contact Technical {(540) 427-3900} with questions on specific Requirements standard high impedance (50,000 ohms) or low balanced (600 ohms) microphone may be The microphone will be required to provide a contact closure (push to talk) for page access. instructions cover the installation procedures the Valcom V-9939A and any associated Valcom Please consult practices for other equipment if any other equipment is used. Refer to Figure 2 for location of screw Refer to Figure 3 for screw connection following sections contain step-by-step for wiring the V-9939A and associated equipment. Each instruction is preceded by a Place a check on the appropriate line as the is completed. The instructions also tests along the way to verify connections have made correctly. If these steps are followed

VSP-9940 4 STATION LEVEL PAGE ADAPTER V-9940 is an Expandable Station Level Page designed to provide ring trip and page access for use on standard device telephone lines. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and the V-9940 Expandable Station Level Page Please review dipswitch settings 3) for equipment suitability. Information installing the V-9940, contact the local company and give them the following The telephone number of the line to which the will connect; The FCC Registration #: BAF9I7-13957-OT-N; The ringer equivalence number: 1.1A the V-9940 is disconnected from its present line, the local telephone company to make them of the change. Company Procedures: The goal of the company is to provide the best service In order to do this, it may occasionally be for them to make changes in their operations, or procedures. If these potentially affect the service or the operation customer equipment, the telephone company will written notice to allow any changes necessary to uninterrupted service. Methods Centrex numbers Loop start and ground start central office lines PABX station numbers 1 depicts a block diagram of a typical PABX Ring trip on first ring Ohm output; 8 Ohm output with AGC Multiple units may be used for multi-zone with all call behind a PABX Use with Valcom multi-zone page control unit multi-zone paging Centrex or C.O. lines signaling only) Use with Valcom handsfree page units for paging Background music input Open loop detect reset Audio sensing circuit for reset Time out reset Manual reset Answer verification tone All call override tone Battery reversal indicator Auxiliary Make/Break contact Built in 66 type connection block Complies with UL 145 Manuals Online! – used with a PABX, the PABX must not return tones to the called party after calling party on a station to station call. Each V-9940 provides one zone of paging (when to its own PABX station number). Use a V-9940 and a station number per zone for paging behind a PABX. An additional station number and V-9940 may used to provide all call or override in a multi-zone system behind a PABX. One V-9940 may be used with a Valcom page unit to provide up to 36 zones paging on Centrex or central office lines signaling only).

VSP-V-9941A 3 ZONE HANDSFREE TALKBACK CONTROL UNIT V-9941A is a one zone handsfree page unit for on an Electronic Key system line key position, a loop start trunk port, a dedicated single line or a 600 ohm two-way page port with a closure. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain One Zone Handsfree Talkback Control Unit. Provides battery feed and loop detect circuitry properly interface with a telephone system O. position or dedicated single line telephone. Provides VOX circuit and handsfree amplifier to 45 ohm talkback speakers. Provides 600 ohm input with ground start input operate on E-Key systems with a 600 ohm way page port and a contact closure. PABX loop start trunk port Electronic key system C. O. Line position Telephone systems with 600 ohm two way page and contact closure Dedicated single line telephone to Figure 1 for a block diagram of a typical When used with additional the V-9941A can also be from a push-to-talk microphone for in restaurant drive-in windows and other applications. Contact Valcom Engineering for information. for ground start from a contact closure Loop start Provides optional battery feed Built in talkback amplifier Directly drives up to two talkback speakers Will drive Valcom one-way amplified speaker alert tone option Screw terminals for all connections Repeated alert tone option Music input Speaker inhibit option Operates on “B” Battery Maximum of two Valcom talkback speakers plus one-way amplified speaker assemblies. Maximum allowable cable distance from control to talkback speakers is 800 feet. Each V-9941A will provide one zone of talkback The V-9941A is a single talkpath unit Each V-9941A will drive up to two 45 Ohm speakers Up to 40 one-way amplified speaker assemblies be used in addition to the talkback speakers Manuals Online! – Key or PABX O. Line or Start Port 1 – Typical Loop Start Trunk Installation H x 4.65″W x 2.3″D (20.96cm H x 11.81cm W x 5.84cm D) lbs. (.68 kg) Requirements to “B” Battery, 300ma max. to 50 Degrees C to 85% non-precipitating DESIGN Valcom V-9941A talkback control unit is to provide paging access from a C. O. or loop start trunk port of a telephone The V-9941A may also be connected to a ohm two-way page port with a contact closure or dedicated single line telephone. The V-9941A all the VOX and handsfree amplifier required to drive up to two Valcom 45 ohm speakers. Key, PABX Access, or Single Line Telephone following components are required when paging a PABX loop start trunk port, Electronic Key C. O. line position or a Dedicated Single Line telephone system C. O. line port or PABX loop trunk port with a circuit card installed or a single line telephone: V-9941A talkback control unit VP-624B power supply ohm talkback speakers (maximum two) Port Access (600 ohms) with Closure following components are required when paging a 600 ohm two-way paging port: ohm two-way paging port with contact closure V-9941A talkback page control VP-624B power supply ohm talkback speaker (maximum two) Music V-9941A provides a background music input, is designed to automatically cut off the music a page. If background music is to be installed, receiver providing an 8 ohm output with 1-3 watts output power will be required. Option V-9941A is equipped with an inhibit lead that be used in special applications to automatically off the speakers and allow a handset between the calling party and a single telephone connected to the paging Tip and Ring. use the inhibi

VSP-V-9943A 3 MULTI-TONE RINGER V-9943A is a Line-Powered Electronic Multi-Tone which is designed for use in an office with a quiet to moderate ambient noise The V-9943A can be connected to a C. O. Line, Station, or common audible contact to provide selectable tone and an LED indication to indicate the of incoming calls. V-9943A has received FCC Registration Number and has a ringer equivalency of The unit is designed to be used with FCC Telephone Systems and installations may be by Valcom, Inc., equipment manufacturers, companies, registered telephone refurbishers, those qualified for installation of FCC-registered under FCC Rules Section 68.215. accordance with FCC Rules with applicable tariffs, Ringer may only be installed with the authorization the owner of the host system. FCC Registration Number will be listed in the filed with the telephone company; it will also recorded in the system log kept by installation and personnel. The local telephone company to be notified of the FCC Registration Number when Unit is installed. RJ11C jack is required for direct interconnection the telephone network. E-Key system common audible ringer. 1A2 key system common audible ringer. PABX station ringer. C.O. line extension ringer. V-9943A is designed to give incoming call Incoming call indication is recognized as an tone and a light. The tone can be a solid or tone. Different frequencies can be selected using switches (See Option Switch Chart). a tone indication when a call is ringing in. selectable tone(s). Volume control. LED indication of incoming call. power supply not required. terminals for all connections x 5.65 x 1.75 x 14.35cm x 4.44cm) lbs. (.23 kg) Requirements Vac (20-30 Hz), 50 mA max. or Vdc, 50 max. Manuals Online! – 2. 1, 2, 3, and 4 set the tones. Refer to Option Switch Chart to obtain the setting the desired tone. S y s tem t ure A C Ring V oltage an as s igned tation port on a A B X, 1A 2 m on audible a Central O ffice (1) (2) witc h 5 us t be in O N ition O R – (1) (2) witc h 5 us t be in O FF ition V-9943A is activated by 70-105 Vac (ring voltage) -24 Vdc (normally through an interrupted contact If the V-9943A is to be connected to the network, two wires should be secured to the terminal connection on the PCB. The other end the wires should terminate at a RJ11C jack. LED provides a visual indication when the unit is tones are dipswitch selectable. The various tones are described in the Option Switch Chart with the switch configuration necessary to obtain tone. dip switches and volume control are accessed the opening in the rear of the enclosure. the Dip Switches 1-4 determine tone. Switch 5 determines AC DC operation. Determine if the equipment will be used with or DC current. For DC current SW5 be in the ON position. For AC current voltage) SW5 should be in the OFF Do Not Use Ring Voltage with SW5 the ON position. Switch the Volume Control volume control is screwdriver adjustable. During setup, it is recommended the volume control be 1/4 turn clockwise. V-9943A has mounting holes located on the sides the unit. Two #10 x 3/4″ wood screws are included mounting purposes. ASSISTANCE in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a Volt ohm and a telephone test set available and be calling the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom Automated Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly

VSP-V-9945A 6 TONE/INTERRUPTED TONE LOUD HORN V-9945A is a horn with built-in tone generator amplifier used for loud signaling applications. instructions provide identification, connection, operation, and maintenance information the V-9945A, Single Tone/Interrupted Warble Horn Ringer. V-9945A provides amplified electronic tones for in large or noisy areas or outside. Night ringing C. O. audible ringing Time clocks Special purpose signaling Self-contained tone generator, amplifier, volume and horn speaker Single tone or warble tone outputs Power supply included Activated by dry contact closure Single tone will override warble tone Warble tone interrupted 1 second on, 5 seconds Single tone continuous for duration of closure Weatherproof Units may be multipled for simultaneous access V-9945A has provisions for two inputs, either or of which can be used in an application. If both are activated simultaneously, the single tone override the warble tone. x 8.2″W x 10.4″D, plus mounting bracket (16.51cm H x 20.83cm W x 26.42cm D) lbs. (1.95 kg) Requirements to -26.0 Vdc “B” battery, 250mA nominal. Temperature: Humidity: to +55 degrees C to 95% non-precipitating Requirements V-9945A requires a dry contact closure for of each tone. (If both tones will be used, closures are required). The closures may be in form of night ringing relay contacts, time clock a standard normally open switch, or Manuals Online! – to the following Table for speaker coverage. first number given is the side to side distance for the speakers. It is also the distance in front the speaker that you can expect to hear a good signal. The second number is the area being in square feet. Noisy ft. ft. 40 ft. 20 ft. Area sq. ft. sq. ft. 1,600 sq. ft. 400 sq. ft. Requirements system using the V-9945A will consist of the Access equipment (See Design Section) V-9945A (Qty. determined in Coverage Section) power supply (included with horn) instructions cover only the installation for the Valcom V-9945A. Please consult for other equipment if any other equipment being used. SYSTEM RING CLOCK Speaker to Base For ease of installation, the base can be to the speaker before or after the base is position adjustment knob. the ball of the base into the socket of speaker. the position adjustment knob. V-9945A should be mounted 12 to 25 high in area requiring signaling. The unit can be mounted a wall, a beam, or an electrical box. the base to a wall using the two holes Knockout holes are provided for out should additional holes be “C” clamp is provided with the ringer to mounting to a beam. Place the bolt the hole in the bottom of the base to the “C” clamp to the beam. (See 2). to an electrical backbox is by channeling wire through ball of the base (see Figure 3) and appropriate connections. The base holes punched for a double-gang square but by punching out additional holes, the base can be mounted to single-gang or octagon box. V-9945A may be rotated or moved up and down obtain the desired position by loosening the knob Figures 2 and 3) at the bottom of the unit 1 turn. Make required adjustment and knob. (+) Vdc tone access tone access should be accomplished using twisted telephone wire. The power supply should be within 500 ft. of the horn. negative (-)(-24 Vdc) lead of the supply to the white lead; connect (+)(Gnd) lead of the power supply

VSP-V-9947A 8 POWERED LOUD RINGER/HORN V-9947A, is a Line Powered Loud Ringer/Horn provides amplified electronic tones for signalling large or noisy areas. This instruction contains the and information necessary to install, and maintain the V-9947A. equipment has received FCC type KX registration and has a REN of 2.7A. The FCC Registration BAF9I7-19317-RG-N, will be listed in the filed with the telephone company; it will also recorded in the system log kept by installation and personnel. The local telephone company to be notified of the FCC Registration Number when equipment is installed. V-9947A is a ringer/horn containing circuitry to incoming call indication via a warble or single when activated by 70-120 Vac ring voltage Equivalency Number 2.7A). plan a system utilizing the V-9947A, refer to the Distance Chart to determine approximate covered. The number given (ft) is the side to distance for mounting the speakers. It is also the in front of the speaker that a good quality can be heard. C. O. audible ringing. Loud ring. Omni-directional mounting bracket. Self-contained tone generator, amplifier, volume and horn speaker. Single or warble tone output. Activated by 70-120 Vac ring voltage. Tones continuous for duration of ring cycle. Weatherproof. Units may be multipled for simultaneous access. Separate power supply not required. x 8.2″W x 10.4″D, plus mounting bracket. H x 20.83cm W x 26.42cm D) lbs. (1.5 kg) Requirements Hz, 35 mA maximum, however, the V- is line driven and a separate power supply not required. Temperature: Humidity: to +55 degrees C non-precipitating Manuals Online! – Connections the tip (green) and ring (red) leads of the ringer the corresponding leads of the telephone the ringer is be used in conjunction with. To produce a warble tone, the black and white remain unconnected. To produce a single tone, connect the black and leads to each other (See Figure 3). Speaker to Base speaker may be attached to the base before or after base is mounted. Loosen position adjustment knob. the ball of the base into the socket of the Tighten the position adjustment knob. V-9947A should be mounted 12 to 25 high to optimum results. This ringer may be used for interior or exterior signalling applications. Mount the base to a wall using the two holes Knockout holes are provided for punch should additional holes be desired. A “C” clamp is provided with the ringer to allow to a beam. Place the bolt through the in the bottom of the base to secure the “C” to the beam. (See Figure 1). It is suggested the horn be mounted to the underside of the “I” so as to provide the maximum of positioning Connection backbox by channeling wire through the ball the base and making appropriate connections. base has holes punched for a double-gang box, but by punching out additional holes, the base can be mounted to a or octagon box. (See Figure 2). V-9947A may be rotated or moved up and down to the desired position by loosening the position knob at the bottom of the unit (See Figures and 2) approximately 1 turn. Make required and re-tighten the knob. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken between the telephone and the ringer. volume control is turned up. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and a set available and be calling from the job site. Call 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or call 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated or visit our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should

VSP-V-9953 3 TALKBACK PLUG-IN BOARD V-9953 Handsfree Talkback Plug-In Board, to be used with the V-2003A, allows the to be converted to a V-2003AHF to permit operation. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install and operate the used in conjunction with the V-2003A. H x 4.75 W x 1.5 D H x 12.06cm W x3.81cm D) lbs (.45 kg) V-9953 can be purchased as an “add on” feature the initial purchase of a V-2003A. By adding a Handsfree Talkback Plug-In Board, the unit can be modified to a V-2003AHF. V-2003AHF is programmable on a per zone for one-way or talkback communication. A zone may have both one-way and talkback One-way speakers should be connected to low level outputs for zone 1 (R/BL pair), zone 2 pair), and zone 3 (R/S pair). These speakers act as one-way for the associated zone whether or the zone is programmed for one-way or talkback 45 ohm speakers are connected to the handsfree and the zone is programmed for one-way, the will receive the page. The zone must be for talkback communication in order to the talkback option. The page volume control on the handsfree board regulates the volume the 45 ohm talkback speakers under both these not connect amplified speakers to the V-9953 zones as they are already amplified. 1. Unplug the V-2003A from the AC power unplug the battery backup if one is 2. the cover of the V-2003A unit by removing the four (4) – #32 screws that the cover to the base. 3. Plug the V-9953 board into the chassis of V-2003A. Insure the proper alignment all pins for proper fit and operation. 4. 5. the V-9953 board to the V-2003A using the two (2) screws and provided. the Phone-Speaker and Speaker-Phone controls into the cover of the as shown in Figure 2. The control the long shaft is Phone to Speaker; the with the shorter shaft is Speaker to Secure these controls with the and nuts provided. sure the tab on the body of the control the enclosure. 6. the cover of the V-2003A unit. the four (4) – #32 screws and tighten to hold in place. Manuals Online! – 7. Affix the enclosed label to the side of the unit to make certain the controls to the V-9953 are identified. 8. Using twisted pair telephone wire, connect 9. Talkback Speakers to the appropriate on the V-2003A connection block 3). Zone 1 speakers connect to the pair, Zone 2 speakers connect to the pair , and Zone 3 speakers connect the BK/S pair. No more than two (2) 45 speakers should be connected to any zone. Do not use 8 ohm speakers. power to the V-2003A, access page adjust the volume controls as required. are separate volume controls for the to Speaker, Speaker to Phone, Page, Music, and Night ring/Warble For best results, the Speaker to Phone control should be turned as low as to where background music is just audible. 10. When using talkback speakers, the zone be set (utilizing the dip switches) for communication. to the V-2003A VSP to determine what each switch activates/de-activates. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that power is being to the unit and there are no broken Check voltages for proper polarity on crossconnect block. If a spare unit is available, to troubleshoot by substituting the spare unit the suspected defective unit. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM, a test set, several clip leads available and be from the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. V-9953 contains no user serviceable parts and is field repairable. A service facility is maintained Roanoke, VA. Should repairs be necessary, attach tag to the unit clearly stating your company name, phone number, contact person, and the of the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be

TALKBACK PLUG-IN BOARD 3 V-9956 Handsfree Talkback Plug-In Board, to be used with the V-2006A, allows the to be converted to a V-2006AHF to permit operation. instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install and operate the used in conjunction with the V-2006A. H x 4.5 W x 1.75 D H x 11.43cm W x 4.44cm D) lbs (.68 kg) V-9956 can be purchased as an “add on” feature the initial purchase of a V-2006A. By adding a Handsfree Talkback Plug-In Board, the unit can be modified to a V-2006AHF. V-2006AHF is programmable on a per zone for one-way or talkback communication. When talkback speakers, the zone must be for talkback communication. A single may have both one-way or talkback speakers. amplified speakers should be connected to low level outputs for zone 1 (W-S pair), zone 2 pair), zone 3 (R-BR pair), zone 4 (BK-BL pair), 5 (BK-G pair), and zone 6 (BK-S pair). These will act as one-way speakers for its zone whether or not the zone is for one-way or talkback paging. If 45 speakers are connected to the handsfree output the zone is programmed for one-way, the will receive the page. The page volume located on the V-9956 board regulates the of the 45 ohm Talkback Speakers under these and also provides volume adjustment Talkback Speakers during group call. The All Call adjustment controls the volume of talkback during all call. using Talkback speakers, the zone must be for Talkback communication. not connect amplified speakers to the V-9956 zones as they are already amplified. 1. Unplug the V-2006A from the AC power unplug the battery backup if one is 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. the cover of the V-2006A unit by removing the 6-32 screws that attach the to the base. the jumper on the V-2006A to handsfree operation. Refer to Figure 1 location of the jumper. the V-9956 board into the chassis of V-2006A as shown in Figure 2. Insure proper alignment of all pins for proper fit operation. the V-9956 board to the V-2006A using the two (2) screws and washers the Phone to Speaker and Speaker to volume controls into the cover of the as shown in Figure 2. The control the long shaft is Phone to Speaker; the with the shorter shaft is Speaker to Secure these controls with the and nuts provided. Manuals Online! – 7. the cover of the V-2006A unit, the 6-32 screws and tighten snugly to in place. 8. Affix the enclosed label to the side of the unit to make certain the controls to the V-9956 are identified. 9. Using twisted pair telephone wire, connect Talkback Speakers to the appropriate (see Figure 3) on the V-2006A block. Zone 1 speakers connect the Y-O pair, Zone 2 speakers connect to Y-G pair, Zone 3 speakers connect to the pair, Zone 4 speakers connect to the pair, Zone 5 speakers connect to the pair, and Zone 6 speakers to the V-O No more than two (2) 45-Ohm should be connected to any zone. Do not use 8 ohm speakers. 10. Restore power to the V-2006A, access page adjust the volume controls as required. are separate volume controls for the to Speaker, Speaker to Phone, Page, Call, Background Music, and Tone For best results, the Speaker to volume control should be turned as as possible to where background music just barely audible. 11. When using talkback speakers, the zone be programmed for talkback Refer to the V-2006A VSP programming instructions. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that power is being to the unit and there are no broken Check voltages for proper polarity on crossconnect block. If a spare unit is available, that unit for the suspected defective unit. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM, clip leads, a telephone test set available and calling from the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. V-9956 contains no user serviceable part

V-9963 FEEDBACK ELIMINATOR 4 DESIGN V-9963 is designed to eliminate acoustic When a page is made, the message is and saved. Upon completion of the live the message is released for broadcast over speakers. (While this page is being broadcast, page can be recorded). This eliminates the squeal of feedback commonly produced by or microphones when making a page. Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Adjustable VOX Sensitivity Two Input Channels: selectable for primary and priority or dual with equal priority inputs are switch selectable for loop start Ohms) or VOX activation Two Audio Outputs: Out (600 Ohms) to Page Control Unit level (8 Ohms) to Amplified Speakers Background music input (adjustable) Three Normally Open Output Relays: Record, Busy Four LED Indicators: Power On, Play, Record, Busy Dip Switch Programmable Message Cancelling Easy to install in new or existing systems Solid State, DSP storage and playback High Fidelity CD Sound Reproduction Loop Start Trunk Port C. O. Line Position Page Port Line Level Audio Feed x 7.8″W x 2.2″D H x 19.81cm W x 5.59cm D) lbs. (1.18 Kg) Specifications Ohms Impedance: dBm Level: Ohms Out Output Impedance: Ohms Level Output Impedance: dBm (nominal) Level: dBm to – 35 dBm Sensitivity: time after last sensed audio: seconds duration of recorded page 60 seconds number of stored pages: Primary/Priority Mode Call Stacker Mode Response Music Hz to 7 kHz Hz to 17 kHz to 40 Degrees C to 85% non-precipitating Notice equipment has been tested and found to comply the limits for Class A digital devices, pursuant to 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to reasonable protection against harmful when the equipment is operated in a environment. This equipment generates, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if installed and used in accordance with the manual, may cause harmful interference to communications. Operation of this equipment a residential area is likely to cause harmful in which case the user will be required to the interference at his own expense. Manuals Online! – is recommended that Category 3 or 5 twisted wire be used in all Valcom speaker A screw type connector strip is to allow connection of all wiring to the V- V-9963 is wall mountable using screws. Connection Access Remove the small side panel to access all and terminations. To remove panel, loosen two screws holding the panel in place and lift away from the board. Treatment If the input signal to the V-9963 exceeds nominal levels specified, attenuate the signal a V-1092. This situation would apply when the output of a Valcom Talkback Page Control is as a One-Way Page input to the V-9963. (Tip1/Ring1) or Call Stacker Line 1 Input primary input is the path normally used to access unit for recording and playback of a page. Method Start Trunk Port System C.O.Line Key Alone Telephone Set Port w/Contact Closure Port w/o Cont. Closure Page Cntrl. Output (600 ohm Output) Output using C.C. OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON Settings (Tip2/Ring2) or Call Stacker Line 2 Input access will override primary input activity. Settings Method ON Start Trunk Port System C.O.Line Key ON ON Alone Telephone Set OFF Port w/Contact Closure OFF Port w/o Cont. Closure Page Ctrl. Output OFF ON (600 ohm Output) Output using C.C. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 1 Input Primary Port or Line 1) External Dry Contact Closure to activate sequence. (Also

VSP-9970 4 ZONE ONE-WAY LEVEL PAGE CONTROL V-9970 is a Single Zone One-Way Station Level Control designed to provide ring trip and page circuitry for use on standard telephone lines Centrex, or C. O. line connections). These contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain Single Zone One-Way Station Level Page Information equipment has been tested and found to comply the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to reasonable protection against harmful when this equipment is operated in a environment. This equipment generates, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if installed and used in accordance with the manual, may cause harmful interference to communications. Operation of this equipment a residential area is likely to cause harmful in which case the user will be required to the interference at his/her own expense. FCC Registration #: BAFUSA-21973-PA-N Ringer Equivalence #:AC 0.6B/DC 0.1B equipment is to be installed only in restricted areas (such as dedicated equipment rooms or closets) in accordance with Articles 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. Automatic Gain Control Paging from standard phone lines Suppression of unwanted sounds (pops and Page tone verification Page disconnect on tones or C.O. open loop Feedback reduction Power on LED Page in progress LED User contacts provided Background music input VOX silence disconnect, user selectable Absolute timeout, user selectable Connects to telephone line via standard RJ11C Vdc or -24 Vdc operation CMOS DSP power efficient green technology only 1 watt average @ 12 volts when a VP-412A – 2 watts during page) FCC Part 68 Compliant UL Approved Manuals Online! – Vdc or Vdc @ 165 ma amp resettable polyswitch Specifications Voltage Input: Paging Detection: Input Level: Ratio: Tone Out: Rejection: Hz Rejection: Voice Out: Response: Impedance: – 130 volts AC – 0dBm dBm (1.09 V p-p) p-p common mode tip/ring p-p common mode tip/ring (.693 V p-p) – 5000 Hz Ohms loop current 20-80 ma from 1-31 seconds 4-124 seconds 440/620, 480/620, 525/660 Hz Timeout: Timeout: Tone Disconnect Frequencies: Music Response: Input Level: Ratio: Rejection: Out: Adjustment: – 20 kHz -0dBm (.15 – 2.2V p-p) dBm dBm dBm (.311 V p-p) nominal adjustable) – 1.1X x 4.5″W x 2.35″D H x 11.43cm W x 5.97cm D) lbs. (.68 kg) to 50oC to 85oC Air Convection – 90% (non-condensing) Temp: Temp: Valcom V-9970 is designed to provide paging from a standard analog PABX station number, C. O. line or analog Centrex line. The Page Control the latest technology Digital Signal (DSP) to recognize and transfer speech thus eliminating unwanted noises such as pops tones. A discriminating Automatic Gain Control is provided to make quiet pages louder and pages quieter. Single Zone One-Way Station Level Page provides a music input with volume control background music and an additional 1 amp relay output. (This input closes during a page provide user page notification if desired). V-9970 Page Control must be powered by a 2 Listed, -12 Vdc output transformer or by Vdc NEC Class 2 power source. using this equipment, basic safety precautions be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric and injury to persons: 1. install telephone wiring during a storm. install telephone jacks in wet unless the jack is specifically for wet locations. touch uninsulated telephone wires or unless the telephone line has been at the network. caution when i

VSP-V-9972 2 E & M PAGE ADAPTER V-9972 Page Adapter provides an interface for of a 5ESS E&M Port and Valcom Page Units. These instructions contain the and information necessary to install, and maintain the 5ESS Paging Adapter. Volume Control Power on LED Background music input Specifications and Ring Input Control E & M Type Page Duration 600 Ohm 0 to 124 seconds (Set by dip switch – 4 second increments) to 210 seconds (Set by dip switch – 30 second increments) Duration Requirements (Filtered Talk Battery) x 4.68″W x 2.30″D H x 11.89cm W x 5.84cmD) lbs. (.64 kg) to 50oC – 85% (non-precipitating) V-9972 allows using a spare E&M port in a central office to access a paging system or a Page Control Unit. The unit is designed with idea that the central office will be using the meet- function to allow the paged party to answer the 5ESS central office seizes the unit with the E- and the unit starts an adjustable 4 to 64 second length timer and connects the calling party to the control unit/paging system. The calling party their page and the page length timer the page control/paging system and gives calling party optional background music. If the party answers the page using the meet-me of the 5ESS or the calling party hangs up, E-Lead releases and resets the unit. If the paged doesn answer, then a second adjustable 30 to second timer that started when the music started release the unit at the programmed time. using this equipment, basic safety precautions be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric and injury to persons: Manuals Online! – Never install telephone wiring during a storm. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations the jack is specifically designed for wet touch uninsulated telephone wires or unless the telephone line has been at the interface. caution when installing or modifying lines. 3. 4. the metal mounting plate from the of the V-9972 enclosure. Using two #6 wood screws, mount the plate in a Vacant on the backboard with the telephone common equipment. Both mounting must be utilized to insure secure of the unit. the V-9972 enclosure to allow access to and option switches. Slide the of the unit (contains the board) onto the plate. a 1/8″ blade screwdriver, connect the E & M Port to terminal screws 5, 6, 9, 10. music is desired, attach two wires from a source output to terminal screws 1 and Volume is adjusted by rotating R2 2. 3. 4. 7. 8. the Page Control Unit to terminal 7 and 8. the Page Control Unit to terminal 3 and 4 for contact closure start for or BGM Mute function. See 1. 48VDC power supply to terminal 13 and 14. dip switches for desired options. (See following for settings). Dip switches for user options should be set for functions prior to replacing the enclosure and plugging in the power supply. 9. cover and plug in power supply. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify the unit is properly and there are no broken connections leading this unit. Assistance in troubleshooting is available the factory. When calling, you should have a and a test set and be calling from the job site. (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24 hour Automated or visit our website at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable and fuses are user replaceable. Valcom, Inc. maintains service in Roanoke, VA. Should repairs be necessary, a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, phone number, contact person, and the nature the problem. Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment

VSP-V-9975 4 BAND EQUALIZER instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and the V-9975, Seven Band Equalizer. active filters Modified 1 octave equalization + 12 dB boost or cut Constant Q equalization Power “ON” indicator Bypass switch to remove EQ from circuit type) High impedance output Line output Specifications Type of Inputs: Type of Outputs: Distortion: Frequency Centers: Hi impedance 10K Ohms (unbalanced) Stereo HiZ 10K Ohms (unbalanced) Line (balanced) Hi impedance 10K Ohms (unbalanced) Frequency Response: 35Hz-20kHz +1dB 0.3% Band 1 = 60 Hz 2 = 200 Hz 3 = 560 Hz 4 = 1100 Hz 5 = 2200 Hz 6 = 4500 Hz 7 =10000Hz Requirements mA H x 8.1″ W x 2.5″ D W x 20.6cm H x 6.4cm D) lbs. (1.27 kg) Temperature: Humidity: 0 to 50 Degrees C 0-85% non-precipitating V-9975 is used to boost or attenuate specific to improve voice intelligibility or frequencies to help reduce feedback. The can also be used to modify the frequency of speakers. “POWER” indicating LED, 7 slide controls (1 for of the bands), and an “EQ” bypass switch are on the front of the unit. The frequencies (1 to 12 dB), are modified with each filter control. The manual “EQ” bypass switch allows of before equalization, and after effect, in area being equalized. All frequency adjustments bypassed when the “EQ IN/OUT” switch is in the position. are accomplished utilizing (3) phono (2 input, 1 output) and/or (9) screw terminals. qualified service personnel should install the See Figures 1 and 2 for actual connections. all connections are made and slide controls to the desired positions, close security cover tighten locking screws. All connections should made and double checked before DC power is to the unit. Manuals Online! – V-9975 is designed for wall mounting. To the unit, install (2) #8 sheet metal screws into the wall 6-1/4 inch apart. Screw heads protrude from wall no more than 1/16 inch. unit on screws. With security cover open, (1) #8 sheet metal screw in slot located at of unit and tighten, to complete the mounting. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that DC power is supplied to the unit and there are no shorts or on cabling. Assistance in troubleshooting is from the factory. When calling, you should a VOM and a telephone test set available and be from the job site. Call (540) 427-3900 and for Technical Support, or call (540) 427-6000 for 24-hour Automated Support or visit our at http://www.valcom.com. equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: and Return Dept. Inc. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will subject to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed

Technical Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

Technical Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

Technical Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

Level Meter II Page Information……………………………1 General Description…………………….. 1-2 Specifications……………………………… 2-3 Name and Functions ……………………. 4-5 Calibration Procedures ………………… 6-7 Measurement Preparation ………………..7 Operating Precautions ……………………..7 Measurement ………………………………….8 LEVEL METER Information the following safety information carefully before attempting to operate or the meter. the meter only as specified in this manual; otherwise, the protection provided the meter may be impaired. Environmental Conditions Maintenance & Cleaning Altitude up to 2000 meters Relative humidity 90% max Operation Ambient 0 ~ 40(cid:176) C Repairs or servicing not covered in this manual should only be performed Periodically wipe the case with a dry cloth. Do not use abrasives or qualified personnel. on this instrument. Safety Symbols with EMC servicing, use only specified replacement parts. Description you for using our Sound Level Meter. To ensure that you can get the from it, we recommend that you read and follow the manual carefully before unit conforms to the IEC651 type 2, ANSI S1.4 type 2 for Sound Level Sound Level Meter has been designed to meet the measurement of safety Engineers, Health, Industrial safety offices and sound control in various environments. Range is from 32dB to 130dB at frequencies between 31.5Hz and 8kHz. LEVEL METER Display with 0.1dB steps on a 4 -digit LCD. Two equivalent weighted sound pressure levels, A and C. AC signal output is available from standard 3.5mm coaxial socket suitable for frequency analyzer, level recorder, FFT analyzer, graphic recorder, etc. Applied: IEC651 Type 2, ANSI S1.4 Type 2. Range: 31.5Hz ~ 8kHz Level Range: 32dB ~ 130 dB Weighting: AC inch electret condenser microphone LCD Display: 4 digit 0.1dB Update: 0.5 sec. Weighting: FAST (125 mS), Slow (1 sec.) Ranges: Lo: 32dB 80dB Med: 50dB 100dB Hi: 80dB 130dB +1.5dB (under reference conditions, 94dB @ 1kHz) Range: 50dB Function: is shown when input is more than upper limit of range. is shown when input is less than lower limit or range. Hold: Hold readings at Maximum and Minimum Value. LEVEL METER Output: 1 Vrms at FS (full scale) impedance: Approx 100 Ohms means the upper limit of each level range Supply: One 9V battery, 006P or IEC 6F22 or NEDA 1604 Life: Approximately 70 hours (alkaline battery) Temperature: 0 to 40(cid:176) C (32 to 104(cid:176) F) Humidity: 10 to 90% Relative Temperature: -10 to 60(cid:176) C (14 to 140(cid:176) F) Humidity: 10 to 75% Relative 9.1 L x 2.1 W x 1.3 H (23.1 cm x 5.3 cm x 3.3 cm) .75 lbs (.34 kg) (including battery) 9V alkaline battery, instruction manual, carrying case, screwdriver, windscreen LEVEL METER And Functions Windscreen you operate at wind speed over 10m/sec, please put protective accessories in of the microphone. Display LEVEL METER Power Button the key turns the sound level meter ON or OFF. MAX / MIN Hold Button button to enter the maximum and minimum recording mode. Select proper Level range before using MAX/MIN to ensure that reading value will exceed the measurement range. Press once to select MAX value. Press t

VSP-V-420 1 NOISE CANCELLING MICROPHONE instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain V-420 Dynamic Noise Cancelling Microphone. Valcom Paging Systems Dynamic Element Soft Lip Guard Cycolac Housing Push to Talk Button Heavy Duty Four Conductor Shielded Cable Low Impedance (Balanced) x 2.97″W x 2.63″D H x 7.54cm W x 6.68cm D) oz. (284 grams) Element Frequency Response Output Impedance Output Level to 5K Hz Z 200 Ohms Z -58 dB = 1 mw/10 microbars) 1 (on reverse) depicts the V-420 connected to Valcom V-9939A microphone adapter. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify the unit is turned on there are no broken connections leading to this Assistance in troubleshooting is available from factory. When calling, you should have a VOM a test set available and be calling from the job Call (540) 427-3900, and ask for Technical or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, Inc. service facilities in Roanoke, VA. Should be necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly your company name, address, phone number, person and the nature of the problem. Send unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – TERMINAL LAYOUT MC HZ RING LZ1 SW GND M Strap shield to positive power lead. (+) (-) 1. CONNECTING ARRANGEMENT Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be liable any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection with the operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

PagePac 2 COIL DESKTOP SPEAKER Desktop Speaker is a completely assembled unit for use with Voice Coil paging sys- Each speaker is equipped with 6-foot wire. Volume Control Talkback 4.75 x 1.75 x 6.88 12.07cm X 4.5cm X 17.48cm) 3.0 lbs (1.4 kg) Desktop Speaker is recommended for use all PagePac Voice Coil paging systems (or systems) in which talkback is provided is two-way communication between the telephone and the paging loudspeaker). the Desktop Speaker may be used with- talkback. is recommended that each Desktop Speaker, used with talkback, be a separate paging If this is not feasible, the total number of Speakers in any one zone should be lim- to two or less. installing PagePac Voice Coil Desktop be sure to use or any similar crimp- type connectors only. This will ensure a solid that will not pull free or become inter- (see Figure 1). CONTROL control adjusts the speaker volume in the page and music modes (see Figure 1). It not affect the talkback level. the Desktop Speaker in the desired the speaker cord to the speaker cable The speaker run to which the Desktop is connected must be connected to the Coil output of the PagePac 6 and PagePac Plus. the Desktop Speaker and ensure that occurs. While a page is in progress, adjust speaker volume with the VOL control. Generally, music volume should be at the music source or on the PagePac 6 PagePac 6 Plus MUSIC VOLUME control. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – ASSISTANCE calling, have a VOM and a telephone test available and call from the job site. Call (540) and ask for PagePac Technical Sup- or call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our websites at and www.valcom.com. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the clearly stating company name, address, number, contact person, and the nature of problem. Send the unit to: Inc. Repair Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Connector” /White wire designates connection TOP CONTROL 1 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

VSP-VP-1024 7 VOLT POWER SUPPLY instruction covers the specifications and necessary to install and maintain the 24 volt power supply offered by Valcom, VP-1024 power supply consists of a transformer, and regulator which provides a dc output of volts at 1.0 amperes. The power supply operates a nominal 117 volt, 60 Hz single phase input. The is short circuit protected. power supply plugs into an ac receptacle. No tools are required for installation. using the VP-1024 with Valcom page control a strap should be added from the local ground the “+” terminal of the power supply. Connections Valcom page control units are shown in Figure 1. installing Valcom one-way amplified horns, the white and black wires of the horn to the supply “-” and “+” terminals respectively. installing Valcom one-way speakers, connect -24V and ground terminals of the speaker to the supply “-” and “+” terminals respectively. SPECIFICATIONS Input: Output Voltage: 105-130VAC, 60Hz, .56 Amp ” 10% amps x 3.75 x 2.25 H x 9.525cm W x 5.7cm D) lbs. (.86 kg) ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that AC power is supplied to the unit. To test the power supply, all output connections and measure the output with a meter. If no voltage is measured, the unit. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling you should have a VOM and a set available and be calling from the job site. (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating your company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – (cid:20)(cid:18)(cid:21) (cid:22) (cid:18)(cid:19) (cid:18)(cid:19) !(cid:14)”(cid:15)#(cid:10)(cid:24)(cid:28)(cid:12)(cid:20)(cid:11)(cid:8)(cid:14)(cid:24)(cid:25) Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective dev

VSP-VP-2024 6 VOLT POWER SUPPLY Risque de Choc Electrique ne pas Current 2 amps at 25 degrees C instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain VP-2024, -24 Volt DC Power Supply offered by Inc. To reduce the risk of fire or shock, do not expose this appliance rain or moisture.” Shock Hazard – Do Not Open.” VP-2024 is a fully regulated Vdc, 2 amp supply. The primary is protected by a fuse; the amp output is electronically protected. The output floating with respect to ground. The regulator will -24 volts +/- 2V over the rated range of voltages and output loads. Short circuit is provided. All Valcom page control units Valcom one-way amplified speaker assemblies Any application where Vdc filtered “talk is required Regulated Vdc “A” Battery Full current limiting Over voltage protection Floating output Fully electronic supply UL Listed x 9.5″W x 6.0″D H x 24.13cm W x 15.24cm D) lbs. (2.72 kg) Requirements voltage 105-120 Vac, 60 Hz, 90 watts Characteristics Vdc regulated +/- 2V Battery Ripple 10 millivolts RMS max 1 amp outputs VP-2024 should be wall mounted within 7 feet of AC receptacle. A cold water pipe or earth ground be connected to the local ground screw using 12 AWG or larger ground wire. If a wire adapter is used, make sure the ground tab is to the local electrical ground. Manuals Online! – Designations (cid:5)%&(cid:9)(cid:6) (cid:5)(cid:1)(cid:9)%*(cid:6)(cid:1)& (cid:12)(cid:21)(cid:12)(cid:11)(cid:9)(cid:19)(cid:12)(cid:11)(cid:27)(cid:18)(cid:15)(cid:18)(cid:25)!(cid:9)(cid:16)(cid:10)(cid:9)”(cid:14)(cid:29)(cid:22)(cid:18)(cid:21)(cid:18)(cid:12)(cid:13)(cid:9)(cid:19)(cid:12)(cid:11)(cid:27)(cid:18)(cid:15)(cid:12)(cid:9)(cid:31)(cid:12)(cid:11)(cid:19)(cid:10)(cid:25)(cid:25)(cid:12)(cid:22)(cid:28)

VSP-VP-2048C 1 VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY VP-2048C is a fully regulated 48VDC 2 amp supply (“A” Battery). The input is fuse and the output is floating with respect to The regulator will maintain 48 + 3 volts over entire input voltage range. Upon power up, a load than 2 amps will shut the power supply off. circuit protection is also provided. The can be used with Valcom V-1038 paging or any application where 48VDC filtered (“A”) is required. The VP-2048C is CSA, UL and approved. SPECIFICATIONS 60 hz, 150 watts +3V “A” Battery 10mV max.) 2 amps @ 25 degrees C 0 to 50 degrees 0 to 85% non-precipitating x 6.35″W x 3.7″D H x 16.0cm W x 9.4cm D lbs. (5.45 Kg) VP-2048C is designed to be wall-mounted within feet of an AC receptacle. 1. Using 12 AWG or larger ground wire, the local ground screw terminal to a water pipe or earth ground. 2. Connect device requiring power to screw labeled -48V, 2A and to the screw labeled GND. 3. Connect a strap between the local ground ground output terminals when using the with Valcom equipment. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify there are no broken Troubleshooting assistance is available the factory. Call (540) 427-3900 and ask for Support, or (540) 427-6000 for Valcom Automated Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – SUPPLY Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

VSP-VP-324 6 VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY instructions provide identification, installation, and operation information for the 24 Volt DC Power Supply. Design VP-324 is a non-regulated “unfiltered Signal which provides 24VDC .25 amp power The output is floating with respect to ground. Short circuit protection is provided. Valcom one-way amplified speaker assemblies Any application where 24 VDC unfiltered signal is required Non-regulated 24VDC “B” battery Thermal overload protection Floating output Short circuit protected Provides 6 Valcom power units Current .25 amp at 25 degrees C x 2.5″W x 2.0″D H x 6.35cm W x 5.08cm D) lbs. (.36 kg) Output: 24VDC +/- 3 V “B” battery Requirements 105-120VAC, 60 Hz, 18 watts Temperature: Humidity: to 50 degrees C to 85% non-precipitating VP-324 is a receptacle mount power supply to be used with a third wire grounded A cold water pipe or earth ground should connected to the local ground screw terminal using AWG ground wire. If a two wire adapter is used, sure the ground tab is bonded to the local ground. the VP-324 is being used with Valcom page equipment, connect a strap between the local and the “+” terminal of the power supply. installing Valcom one-way amplified horns, the white and black wires of the horn to the supply “-” and “+” terminals respectively. installing Valcom one-way amplified speakers, the -24V and ground terminals of the speaker the power supply “-” and “+” respectively. Manuals Online! – (cid:27)(cid:28)!(cid:15)(cid:31)(cid:27)(cid:15)(cid:16)(cid:28)(cid:29)(cid:9)(cid:17)”#(cid:15)(cid:23)$%& (cid:29)((cid:15)(cid:19)%(cid:29)”)(cid:29)*! !(cid:15)(cid:28)(cid:27)*$”&&#(cid:15) (cid:28)/(cid:15)”$%& (cid:29)((cid:15)(cid:15)!%(cid:29)”)(cid:29)*! ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that AC power is supplied to the unit. test the power supply, remove all output and measure the output voltage with a The voltage should be 24VDC +/- 3V. If no is measured, replace the unit. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and a set available and be calling from the job site. (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, call (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Support or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating your company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or

VSP-VP-4024C 2 VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY instructions provide the specifications, installation and information for the VP-4024C, -24 Volt Power VP-4024C is a fully regulated Vdc, 4 amp power supply. primary is protected by a 2 amp 5×20 mm fuse. The output is with respect to ground, and the two outputs may be together for one 4 amp output. The regulator will -24 volts 2.5 volts over the rated range of input voltages output loads. A greater than 4 amp load on power up will the power supply to current limit. Short circuit protection is Over voltage is provided to limit the output voltage to -28 volts should a failure occur within the power To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose rain or moisture. Shock hazard Do Not Open. Risque de choc Electrique ne pas Ouvrir. Corriente Electrica No Abres. For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only 2A, 125V fast acting type fuse 5×20 mm, UL Listed. VP-4024C is designed to be used with: All Valcom page control units that require Vdc Valcom one-way amplified speaker assemblies require Vdc Any application where -24 Vdc filtered talk is required fuse protected Features Regulated Vdc “A” battery Two 2 amp outputs Outputs may be connected for one 4 amp output LED indication of operation Full current limiting Over voltage protection Floating output Full electronic supply Manuals Online! – Specifications Requirements Voltage: Characteristics: Vac, 60 Hz, 150 watts max x 6.35″W x 3.75″D H x 16.13cm W x 9.53cm D) lbs. (5.45 kg) -24 Vdc regulated “A” battery Ripple 10 millivolts RMS max. Two 2 amp outputs Temp: 50 deg. C Air Convection 90% (non-condensing) VP-4024C is designed for wall mounting only. unit should be mounted within 7 feet of an AC mounting plate to wall and position power on mounting plate via the mounting slots. Notes: (cid:5)%&(cid:9)(cid:6) (cid:5)(cid:1)(cid:9)%*(cid:6)(cid:1)& (cid:12)(cid:21)(cid:12)(cid:11)(cid:9)(cid:19)(cid:12)(cid:11)(cid:27)(cid:18)(cid:15)(cid:18)(cid:25)!(cid:9)(cid:16)(cid:10)(cid:9)”(cid:14)(cid:29)(cid:22)(cid:18)(cid:21)(cid:18)(cid:12)(cid:13)(cid:9)(cid:19)(cid:12)(cid:11)(cid:27)(cid:18)(cid:15)(cid:12)(cid:9)(cid:31)(cid:12)(cid:11)(cid:19)(cid:10)(cid:25)(cid:25)(cid:12)(cid:22)(cid:28)

VSP-VP-412A 8 VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain VP-412A, 12 Volt DC Power Supply. VP-412A is a 12 volt DC power supply designed provide up to .4 amp of 12 Vdc “unfiltered The VP-412A features a right angle connector. VP-412A is for use with the Valcom V-2952 Tuner. H x 2.0″ W x 2.3” D H x 5.1cm W x 5.8cm D) lbs. (.32 kg) High impact, ABS plastic case UL listed Requirements 105-130 V, 60 Hz Temperature:0 to 50 Degrees C Humidity: 0 to 85% non-precipitating VP-412A is a receptacle mount, 2-prong power with a coaxial “barrel-type” plug. install the VP-412A, insert the plug into the hole on the marked “-12 Vdc.” (Refer to the on the next page. 2-prong power supply into 120 Vac receptacle. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that AC power is supplied to the unit. test the power supply, remove barrel-type plug the V-2952 and measure the output voltage with meter. Nominal voltage unloaded should measure to 24 Vdc. If no voltage is measured, replace the in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and be calling from the job site. Call 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, or (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated or visit our website at VP-412A is not field repairable. Should repairs necessary, attach a tag to the unit clearly stating company name, address, phone number, contact and the nature of the problem. Send the unit Inc. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Manuals Online! – being used with the V-2952 Tuner. Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misuse, or negligence after the original shipment. product has not been altered in any way or repaired by others and that factory sealed units are unopened (A service plus parts and labor will be applied to units defaced or physically damaged), charges for the return of products to Valcom are prepaid, units of warranty are subject to a service charge. The service charge will cover minor repairs (Major repairs will be to additional charges for parts and labor). warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, expressed or implied, and in no event shall Valcom, Inc. be for any anticipated profits, consequential damages, loss of time or other losses incurred by the buyer in connection the purchase, operation, or use of the product. warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment. In the event a product is received in damaged condition, the should be notified immediately. Claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier involved in accordance with the point. Inc. Industry Avenue VA 24013 (540) 427-3900 (540) 427-3517 Canada Corporation Van Kirk Drive #11 and 12 Ontario L7A1A5 (905) 456-1072 (905) 456-2269 Manuals Online! –

VSP-VP-6124-UPS 2 ON OPTION FOR THE VP-6124/VP-6124-E SUPPLY VP-6124-UPS is an optional unit that allows the to supply power during a power VP-6124-UPS is comprised of a VP-6124-UPS, and a VBB-1424 (Battery Enclosure). The connects to the VP-6124 Power (to receive power to charge the batteries). below are specifications and recommendations power sources as well as precautionary Float Standby Charging Voltage: Limit: volts (13.8 per battery) mA charging mA at 27 volt final charge amp auto-reset polyswitch amp accidental reverse battery polyswitch Required to Recharge Battery battery: hours of Time Battery will Provide With four 7AH 12V batteries for 14AH total of batteries greater than 7AH is not recom- since 90% of all power outages are less than hour in length and the time to evacuate a building less than an hour. amp load draw: amp full load: hours run time hours run time To insure troublefree UPS back-up five year batteries must be replaced five from the date of manufacturing. H x 3.5 W x 2.25 D H x 8.89cm W x 5.72cm D) lbs. (1.32 kg) VP-6124-UPS (charger) is designed for wall only. Screw mounting plate to the wall the VP-6124/VP-6124-E and position the onto the mounting plate. the UPS unit securely to the bracket lip using 6-32 x 3/8″ long Phillips head self-tapping screw Place the VBB-1424 on the floor within six of the unit. Disconnect AC power from the power supply. Remove plug button from the Remove wire access cover from the Using the cable designated by the tag labeled P/N WA-784 with 4 position connector attached to VP-6124-UPS, (charger), place molex connector through the hole on the supply and connect the charger to the input connector on the VP-6124 Power Snap strain relief into place. Replace wire access cover on the Remove cover from Battery Backup. Push cable labeled Valcom P/N WA-783 with 2 connector through the hole on the Manuals Online! – enclosure and snap strain relief into Attach connector from VP-6124-UPS to battery Replace access cover. Plug power cord from VP-6124/VP-6124-E into outlet. Turn ON circuit breaker on Battery Backup. a power failure occurs, the charger beeps to personnel that the supply is operating on the and there is a 1.5 hour run time available at amp full load. Pressing the white button will mute beeping. are three (3) LEDs located on the charger. the charger is connected to the power supply, the green LED signifying the power supply and charger on line and the batteries are charging. the red LED illuminates, this denotes that the have dropped below 20 volts and the UPS into low voltage shutdown to protect the from damage. This disconnects the load. red LED will turn off and batteries reconnect power returns and the batteries are charged 25V. the battery test button illuminates the yellow if the battery is above 24 volts (signifies a good (The charger will charge the batteries to volts in a 14 hour period assuming completely batteries). must be replaced every five years. To reduce the risk of fire or injury persons, read and follow these Supplied with four (4) Union Type MX12070 Use only Union Type MX12070 Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire. The cell explode. Check with local codes for possible disposal instructions. Do not open or mutilate the batteries. Released is corrosive and may cause damage to eyes or skin. It may be toxic if swallowed. Exercise care in handling batteries in order not to the battery with conducting materials such as bracelets, and keys. The battery or may overheat and cause burns. Do not attempt to recharge the batteries provided this or identified for use with this product. batteries may lea

VSP-VP-624B 8 VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY instructions provide identification, installation, operation, and maintenance information the VP-624B, fully regulated, 24 Volt DC, .6 amp Power Supply. Information reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, directly to a grounding receptacle prong. reduce the risk of electric shock – power to the receptacle before or removing the unit. When receptacle cover screw, cover may across plug pins or receptacle may displaced. only with duplex receptacle having unit in place by receptacle cover All Valcom page control units Valcom one-way amplified speaker assemblies Any application where 24VDC filtered talk battery is Regulated 24 volts DC “A” filtered battery Thermal overload protection Floating output Short circuit protected UL Listed Current: .6 amp at 25 degrees C Output: 24VDC +/- 3V “A” filtered battery (ripple H x 3.30 x 3.25 H x 8.38cm W x 8.26cm D) 1.6 lbs. (.73 kg) Specifications max.) Requirements 105-120VAC 60 Hz, 36 watts Temperature: Humidity: to 50 Degrees C to 85% non-precipitating VP-624B is a receptacle mount power supply to be used with a third wire grounded A cold water pipe or earth ground should connected to the local ground screw terminal using AWG ground wire. If a two wire adapter is used, sure the ground tab is bonded to the local ground. the VP-624B is being used with Valcom page equipment, connect a strap between the local and the positive (+) terminal of the power The figure below shows connections to page controls. Manuals Online! – installing Valcom one-way amplified horns, the white and black wires of the horn to the supply (-) and (+) terminals respectively. to Valcom Page Control installing Valcom one-way amplified speakers, the -24V and ground terminals of the speaker the power supply (-) and (+) terminals respectively. DESCRIPTION VP-624B is a fully regulated 24VDC, .6 amp supply. The output is floating with respect to A greater than .6 amp load will cause the supply to current limit. Short circuit is provided. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that AC power is supplied to the unit. test the power supply, remove all output and measure the output voltage with a The voltage should be 24VDC +/- 3 V. If no is measured, replace the unit. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and a set available and be calling from the job site. (540) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag to the unit stating your company name, address, phone contact person, and the nature of the Send the unit to: Inc.. and Return Dept. Hollins Road VA 24019-5056 Inc. warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under conditions of normal use and service a period of one year from the date of shipment. The obligation under this warranty shall be limited to the replacement, repair or of any such defective device within the warranty period, provided that: LIMITED WARRANTY by Valcom, Inc. indicates the validity of the claim, defect is not the result of damage, misus

VSP-VPB-260 5 BACK-UP SUPPLY instructions contain the specifications and necessary to install, operate, and maintain VPB-260, Battery Back-up Power Supply. VPB-260 provides a battery source to permit operation in the event of an AC power failure. and 24 volt DC outputs Outputs fused at 3 amps AC input fuse protected Power on LED indication Full current limiting on battery charger Long life Gel Cell Batteries Battery test switch with light indication 1 shows the approximate times for a fully supply to reach 90% voltage under different conditions. All electronic key systems will begin to intermittently below a certain input voltage. Typically reliable operation will be maintained to of full voltage. 1 Current vs. Time Amps Amp Amp Amp hr. 40 min. hours hours hours VPB-260 is known to be compatible with the systems: Systems: 616 (see Application Note) 6120 (reverse 12V & 24V leads) 16 (WA-260T may be required) 1032 VS CX 512 CX 816 Telecom 1A2 Telplus Telplus 816 1224 612 (WA-260P required) 1032 (WA-260P required) II (820) (WA-260P required) 308EX 616EX 1224EX Page Controls V-2001A, V-2003, V-2003A, V-2003HF, V-2006, V-2006A, V-2006HF, V-2901, V-2901A, V-2904, V-2920, Manuals Online! – H x 7.5″ W x 5.25″ D H x 19.05cm W x 13.3cm D) lbs (8.6 kg) Output 24 Vdc and 12 Vdc fused at 3 amps each Current limited, constant voltage charger Gel Cell no maintenance type batteries Typical battery life is 3-5 years Requirements 105-120 Vac, 60 Hz Temperature Humidity to 50 Degrees C to 85% non-precipitating VPB-260 is a fully filtered battery back-up supply. The input and both outputs are fuse The charger circuit output is floating with to ground. The charging circuit provides a voltage and is current limited to 1.5 amps to two Gel Cells. There is a “power on” LED that is when the supply is connected to the AC source. There is also a test button for testing batteries. When pressing this button, the LED illuminate if the batteries are fully charged. 1: Low Voltage Plug Outputs the appropriate hardware, mount the VPB-260 6 feet of an AC receptacle. the KSU power cord. Consult the installation of the key system for the location of the input for the battery backup supply. Plug the low power cord of the auxiliary power system into socket. The plug is polarized and will only fit one After making sure that the plug is seated in the plug in the AC power cords. Both the AC cord for the VPB-260 and the power cord for KSU should use the same AC outlet. Figure 1 low voltage plug outputs. Time to reach a full charge after initial or after a deep discharge is 9 hours. order to insure proper operation of the battery the following operation should be performed a month. the key system from the AC power receptacle allow operation from the batteries for 15 minutes. key system power cord into AC outlet. ASSISTANCE trouble is reported, verify that AC power is supplied to the unit and there are no blown To test the batteries for full charge, unplug the and press the button marked test on the side the unit. The LED lights when batteries are okay. in troubleshooting is available from the When calling, you should have a VOM and a set available and be calling from the job site. (703) 427-3900 and ask for Technical Support, (540) 427-6000 for Valcom 24-hour Automated or visit our website at equipment is not field repairable. Valcom, maintains service facilities in Roanoke, VA. repairs be necessary, attach a tag

PagePac PLUS ZONE EXPANSION UNIT 1 Zone Expansion Unit (Z.E.U.) connects up to zones of audio output (including talkback), closure outputs or inputs. (see Table 2) Provides same features as PP+ Controller Maximum of 3 Z.E.U.s per Controller Requirements Power from the PP+ Controller through the interconnect cable 16.00 x 1.75 x 6.875 x 4.45cm x 17.46cm) 3.0 lbs (1.35 kg) to 95% Temperature:0 to 40 (32 to 104 Humidity: in an area free of excess moisture, corro- gases, dust and chemicals. When installing the Zone Expansion Unit, at least four inches of space above and for proper ventilation. the paging equipment in a ventilated where there is easy access to speaker (preferably in the telephone equipment Disconnect all power before installing Mount the Zone Expansion Unit(s)(Z.E.U.) to a wall, cabinet or a rack (below the con- Connect 8-pin Molex from Controller to first and next Z.E.U if used. Up to 3 Z.E.U.s can be used, providing up 56 paging and/or control zones. Set DIP switches on each Z.E.U.(s). Set the Zone Option switches on the and Z.E.U.(s). For each zone used, no matter what its this switch needs to be set to one of settings for proper zone operation before power to the system. Controller has eight switches for zones 1-8. subsequent Z.E.U. has switches for zones 25-40, 41-56. to the Zone Map and Zone Configuration filled out during facility paging system You can find these in the PagePac Sys- Installation and Configuration Guide. Locate and mount all speakers in accordance the floor plan drawing for this installation. Connect each speaker to the appropriate Run or Speaker-to-Speaker wiring as shown on the floor plan. Adjust all speakers per volume and power as noted on floor plan, during or installation. Figures 7 and 8 show wiring using local and zone connector blocks, contact closure zone applications. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Test speaker wiring for short circuits. the resistance of each Home Run wiring an ohmmeter. Any pair indicating a value of than 15 Ohms must be rechecked for possi- shorted wiring or speakers. Correct any prob- and retest. Make zone connections to Controller and (see Figures 5 thru 7). zone connectors on the Controller and Z.E.U. accommodate up to two 22 AWG wires or four AWG wires per zone output. Check zone switch setting with Zone Map and Zone tables as you connect each zone. DO NOT over tighten zone connector Up System all zones wired and connected to the Con- and Z.E.U.(s), initial testing can begin. initial testing is done, you can begin to pro- the Controller with the features for each Plug the power cord into the AC input connec- on the AmpliCenter the following should The green Power LED on the AmpliCenter turn on and stay on. The green Page Access LED on the also turns on, but will go out a few seconds. On the Controller, verify that the green System Enabled LED is off. On the Controller, verify that the yellow Access Enabled LED is off. The green Power LED on the Z.E.U.(s) will on and stay on. If during power up, the system does not as described, refer to the Troubleshoot- section of this guide, and/or the PagePac System Installation and Configuration guide detailed troubleshooting. Begin programming the Controller. quick reference card for telephone program- along with detailed programming instruc- can be found in the PagePac Plus System and Configuration Guide, common problems encountered when the system is not operating are described Check each item in the order listed. No AC power to AmpliCenter or Controller supply power to the Z.E.U.(s)). Host telephone system failure. Host system page port failure. A hardwire disconnect between host system Controller. AmpliCenter, Controller, or Z.E.U. zone